Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptor
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
Este manual también es adecuado para
HTR-6230
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
Caution-i En
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may
cause the product and cart combination to
overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Caution-ii En
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
Caution-iii En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press ASTANDBY/ON to set this
unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
........................................ AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the
same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are
incorrectly replaced.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by ASTANDBY/ON. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
1 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Features.................................................................... 2
Supplied accessories .................................................. 2
Functional overview................................................ 3
Front panel ................................................................. 3
Front panel display..................................................... 4
Remote control........................................................... 5
Rear panel .................................................................. 6
Quick start guide..................................................... 7
L
Preparation of remote control ............................... 8
Connections ............................................................. 9
Placing speakers......................................................... 9
Connecting speakers .................................................. 9
Connecting video components................................. 11
Connecting other components ................................. 13
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 15
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 15
Connecting the power cable..................................... 15
Turning on and off the power .................................. 15
Basic setup ............................................................. 16
Playback................................................................. 17
Basic procedure........................................................ 17
Additional operations............................................... 18
Selecting the SCENE templates ...........................21
Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 21
Creating your original SCENE templates................ 23
Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 24
Sound field programs ...........................................25
Selecting sound field programs................................ 25
FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 27
Overview.................................................................. 27
FM/AM tuning operations ....................................... 27
Preset FM/AM stations ............................................ 27
Using iPod™ .......................................................... 29
Control and functions for iPod™............................. 29
Using Bluetooth™ components............................ 30
Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and your Bluetooth™
component ........................................................... 30
Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 30
Set menu ................................................................ 31
Using set menu......................................................... 32
1 SOUND MENU .................................................... 32
2 INPUT MENU ...................................................... 34
3 OPTION MENU ................................................... 35
Remote control features ....................................... 37
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components .... 37
Setting remote control codes.................................... 39
Advanced setup..................................................... 40
Troubleshooting.................................................... 41
Glossary ................................................................. 46
Specifications......................................................... 47
Index ...................................................................... 48
(at the end of this manual)
Contents
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
List of remote control codes...................................i
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the
front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button
names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the
button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications
are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case
of differences between the manual and product, the product has
priority.
• “ASTANDBY/ON” or “fDVD” (example) indicates the name of
the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the
“Functional overview” on page 3.
2 En
INTRODUCTION
Built-in 5-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 100 W/ch
Center: 100 W
Surround: 100 W/ch
[Other models]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front: 100 W/ch
Center: 100 W
Surround: 100 W/ch
Various input/output connectors
◆ HDMI (IN x 2, OUT x 1), Component video (IN x 3, OUT x
1), Composite video (IN x 3, OUT x 2), Coaxial digital audio
(IN x 1), Optical digital audio (IN x 2), Analog audio (IN x 9,
OUT x 2)
◆ Speaker out (5-channel), Subwoofer out
◆ Discrete multi-channel input (6-channel)
SCENE select function
◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations
◆ SCENE template customizing capability
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of surround
field
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode
◆ SILENT CINEMA™
Decoders and DSP circuits
◆ Dolby Digital decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder
◆ DTS decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA™
Sophisticated FM/AM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition
video (includes 1080p video signal transmission)
DOCK terminal
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately)
Other features
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ iPod controlling capability
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,487,535 and
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and pending.
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos and
symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS,
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
iPod™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG
and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license
agreement.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition
Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha
Corporation.
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s
Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out
of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that
lets the sound come through loud and clear without
annoying blaring or distortion - and, most importantly,
without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic
Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from
excessive volume levels.
Check that you received all of the following parts.
❏ Remote control
❏ Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4)
❏ AM loop antenna
❏ Indoor FM antenna
Features
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Supplied accessories
3 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
A STANDBY/ON
Turns on this unit, or sets it to standby mode (see page 15).
B PHONES jack
Connect to a pair of headphones (see page 19).
C SPEAKERS
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
FRONT A or FRONT B speaker terminals (see page 18).
D EDIT PRESET/TUNING
Switches the tuning mode (see page 27).
E A/B/C/D/E
Selects the preset station group (A to E) (see page 28).
F PRESET/TUNING l / h
Tunes into radio stations manually or automatically and selects a
preset station group (see page 27).
G BAND
Selects the reception band from FM and AM (see page 27).
H MEMORY
Stores a station that you tuned into as a preset station (see
page 27).
I TUNING AUTO/MAN’L
Selects a tuning method from automatic or manual tuning (see
page 27).
J SCENE 1/2/3/4
Recalls an input source and a sound field program assigned to
each SCENE button (see page 21).
K TONE CONTROL
Selects “BASS” and “TREBLE” to adjust frequency response
(see page 19).
L PROGRAM l / h
Selects a sound field program (see page 25).
M STRAIGHT
Activates the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 26).
N INPUT l / h
Selects an input source (see page 17).
O NIGHT
Selects a night listening mode (see page 19).
P VOLUME control
Adjusts the volume level of this unit (see page 17).
Q VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack
Connects to a game console or a video camera using a
composite video cable (see page 15).
R AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jacks
Connects to a game console or a video camera using analog
audio cables (see page 15).
S PORTABLE (VIDEO AUX) jack
Connects to an audio component (such as iPod) (see page 15).
T Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see
page 17).
Functional overview
Front panel
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
INPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
PORTABLE
VIDEO
AUX
VOLUME
EFFECT
l
h
l
h
SCENE
STANDBY
/ON
1
NIGHT
2
3
4
SPEAKERS
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
l
h
BAND
MEMORY
TUNING
AUTO/MAN'L
A
C D G H I
K OL N R
T PE F
J QSBM
4 En
Functional overview
a Decoder indicator
Lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions.
b ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
selected (see page 25).
c VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 26).
d SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field
program is selected (see page 26).
e DOCK indicator
Lights up or flashes according to the state of Yamaha iPod
universal dock or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver connected
to this unit (see pages 14 and 30).
f Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
g Tuner indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode (see
page 27).
h MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 19).
i VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
j PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
k Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 19).
l SP A B indicators
Lights up according to the set of front speakers selected (see
page 17).
m NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 19).
n CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a sound filed program (see page 26).
o Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
p SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 20).
q Input channel and speaker indicators
• LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
• Input channel indicators
Indicates the channel components of the current digital input
signal.
Front panel display
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
q
PL
q
PL
ENHANCER
SILENT CINEMA
NIGHT
DOCK
AUTO
PRESET
TUNED
MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
A B
SP
mS
ft
dB
LFE
LCR
SL SR
q
DIGITAL
t
dB
STEREO
ab c de f ghi
jklmnopq
LFE
LCR
SL SR
LFE indicator
Input channel indicators
5 En
Functional overview
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
a Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals (see page 8).
b TV/AV POWER
Turns your TV or other components on or off (see page 38).
c STANDBY ( )
Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 15).
d POWER ( )
Turns this unit on (see page 15).
e MUTE
Mutes audio output (see page 19).
f Input selector buttons
Switches the input source to each source (see page 17).
g TV control buttons
Controls your TV (see page 37).
h AMP
Press this button before you control this unit (see page 17).
i SCENE 1/2/3/4
Recalls an input source and a sound field program assigned to
each SCENE button (see page 21).
j BAND LEVEL TITLE
Selects the speaker that you want to adjust (see page 19).
k MENU
Displays the set menu on the front panel display (see page 32).
l Cursors (l / h / n / k) / ENTER
• Press cursors to navigate the set menu (see page 32).
• Press ENTER to confirm a selection in the set menu (see
page 32).
m VOLUME +/–
Adjusts the volume level of this unit (see page 17).
n RETURN
Returns the previous menu level when the set menu is displayed
(see page 32).
o DISPLAY
Displays the information of external components (such as a
DVD player) (see page 38).
p Control buttons
Control external components (such as a DVD player) connected
to this unit (see page 38).
q PROG l / h
Selects the sound field program (see page 25).
r ENHANCER
Sets the sound field program to the “Music Enh. 2ch” or “Music
Enh. 5ch” (see page 25).
s SUR.DECODE
Selects a decoder from four decoders (see page 26).
t STRAIGHT
Activates the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 26).
u NIGHT
Selects a night listening mode (see page 19).
v MULTI CH IN
Sets the input source to MULTI CH IN (see page 18).
w AUDIO SEL
Selects an audio input select setting for each input source (see
page 18).
x SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 20).
y Numeric buttons
Enter remote control codes or preset station number (see
page 39).
Remote control
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
BAND LEVEL
TITLE
MENU
RETURN
ENTER
REC
PROG
ENHANCER
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENT
DISPLAY
VOLUME
AMP
DTV/CBL
DVR
TV CH
TV VOL
TV INPUT TV MUTE
POWER POWER
MUTE
STANDBY
TV
AB
AV
C
D E
SCENE
12
2341
6
0
7
10
85
9
34
P
R
E
S
E
T
/
C
H
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
P
R
E
S
E
T
/
C
H
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
y
c
k
r
u
o
d
e
s
x
g
m
a
b
i
q
p
h
j
n
t
v
f
l
w
6 En
Functional overview
a DOCK terminal
Connect to the Yamaha iPod Universal Dock (such as YDS-11,
sold separately) or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as
YBA-10, sold separately) using its dedicated cable (see
page 14).
b COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Connect to Y, PB/CB and PR/CR jacks on your video components
with component video cables (see page 11).
• DVD input jacks
• DTV/CBL input jacks
• DVR input jacks
• MONITOR OUT output jacks
c HDMI terminals
Connect to HDMI output/input terminals on your external
components with HDMI cables (see page 11).
• HDMI DVD terminal
• HDMI DTV/CBL terminal
• HDMI OUT output terminal
d VIDEO jacks
Connect to video jacks on your video components with
composite video cables (see page 11).
• DVD input jack
• DTV/CBL input jack
• DVR IN jack
• DVR OUT jack
• MONITOR OUT jack
e ANTENNA terminals
Connect to the supplied FM and AM antennas (see page 15).
f SPEAKERS terminals
Connect to each speakers (see page 9).
• FRONT A L/R
• FRONT B L/R
• SURROUND L/R
• CENTER
g DIGITAL INPUT jacks
Connect to the DIGITAL output jacks on your digital audio
components with Coaxial/Optical digital audio cables.
This input jacks support PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstream
(see page 11).
• COAXIAL (DVD)
• OPTICAL (DTV/CBL)
• OPTICAL (CD)
h MULTI CH INPUT jacks
Connect to the output jacks on your multi-format player or
external decoder with analog audio cables (see page 14).
• FRONT L/R jack
• SURROUND L/R jack
•CENTER jack
• SUBWOOFER jack
i AUDIO jacks
Connect to the audio output/input jacks on your components
with analog audio cables (see page 11).
• DVD L/R jack
• DTV/CBL L/R jack
• DVR IN L/R jack
• DVR OUT L/R jack
• CD L/R jack
• IN (PLAY) L/R jack
• OUT (REC) L/R jack
j SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
Connect to a Subwoofer with an analog audio cable (see
page 9).
k Power cable
Connect to a standard AC outlet (see page 15).
Rear panel
DOCK
DIGITAL INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUT
HDMI
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
DVD
OPTICAL
DVD
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT B
FRONT A
DVR
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
DTV/CBL
DVD
DVR
FM
AM
GND
IN
OUT
DTV/CBL
DVD
DVR
CD
OUTPUT
SUB
WOOFR
IN
OUT
MD/
CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
CD
P
R
P
B
Y
DVD
COAXIAL
DTV/
CBL
OUT
UNBAL.
a
g h i j
e fc db
k
7 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The following steps describe the easiest way to operate this unit. See the related pages for details on the operation and
settings.
In these steps, you need the following items which are not
included in the package of this unit.
❏ Speakers
We recommend magnetically shielded speakers.
❏ Front speaker ..................................... x 2
At least two front speakers are required to start
playback.
❏ Center speaker ................................... x 1
❏ Surround speaker .............................. x 2
❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
❏ Speaker cable ......................................... x 5
❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output jack.
❏ Video monitor ......................................... x 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.
❏ Video cable ............................................. x 2
Select an RCA composite video cable.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
Connect your TV, DVD player or other components.
Connect the power cable and turn on this unit.
Select the component connected in the step 3 as an input
source and start playback.
Quick start guide
Step 1: Check the items
Step 2: Set up your speakers
• Placing speakers ☞P. 9
• Connecting speakers ☞P. 9
Video monitor
Front left
speaker
Center speaker
DVD player
Surround left
speaker
Surround right
speaker
Subwoofer
Front right
speaker
Step 3: Connect your components
• Connecting a TV monitor or projector ☞P. 1 2
• Connecting audio and video components ☞P. 1 3
• Connecting a multi-format player or an external
decoder ☞P. 1 4
• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver ☞P. 1 4
• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel
☞P. 1 5
• Connecting the FM and AM antennas ☞P. 1 5
Step 4: Turn on the power
• Connecting the power cable ☞P. 1 5
• Turning on and off the power ☞P. 1 5
Step 5: Select the input source and start
playback
• Basic procedure ☞P. 1 7
• Selecting the SCENE templates ☞P. 2 1
• Adjusting the sound field programs ☞P. 25
8 En
PREPARATION
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+
and –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
Notes
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of
them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes,
or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents
of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert
new batteries and set up the remote control code.
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
a Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
y
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 39.
Notes
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of
conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 39.
Preparation of remote control
Installing batteries in the remote control
1
3
2
Using the remote control
30º 30º
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
9 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we
recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from
any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound
reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel
included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position
of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass
sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place
the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly
toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources
accurately.
■ 5.1-channel speaker connection
Connections
Placing speakers
60˚
30˚
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
SW
Connecting speakers
Caution
• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on
the rear panel of this unit.
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this
the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall
outlet.
• Do not let the bare speakers wires touch each other or
do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This
could damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speaker still creates interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP
IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit. See
page 40 for details on setting “SP IMP.”
LRLR
LR
HDMI
VIDEO
AUDIO OUTPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
B
L
D
DTV/CBL
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
FRONT A
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DVR
B
L DVR CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
a b
c
d
f
g
e
h
10 En
Connections
* You can select the front speaker set from Front speakers (A) and Front
speakers (B) by pressing CSPEAKERS repeatedly. See page 18 for
details.
■ Connect speaker cables to each speaker
Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.)
cable to the “+” (red) terminals of your speaker. Connect
the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS
terminal
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then
twist the bare wires of the cable together to
prevent short circuits.
■ Connecting to the FRONT A terminals
1 Loosen the knob.
2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into
the slit on the terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Connecting the banana plug (except Europe,
Russia, Korea, and Asia models)
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the
knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
■ Connecting to the FRONT B, CENTER, and
SURROUND terminals
1 Press down the tab.
2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into
the hole on the terminal.
3 Release the tab to secure the wire.
Speakers Jacks on this unit
a Front speaker (A) Right* FRONT A (R)
b Front speaker (A) Left* FRONT A (L)
c Surround speaker Right SURROUND (R)
d Surround speaker Left SURROUND (L)
e Center speaker CENTER
f Front speaker (B) Right* FRONT B (R)
g Front speaker (B) Left* FRONT B (L)
h Subwoofer SUBWOOFER
10 mm (3/8”)
1
2
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
11 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Audio jacks and cable plugs
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
COAXIAL jack
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cable.
OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
Notes
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS
bitstreams. All digital input jacks are compatible with digital signals with
up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.
• This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio
signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT
(REC) jack.
Video jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y)
and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals transmitted on
separate wires of component video cables.
You can play back pictures by connecting your video
monitor and video source component to this unit using
HDMI connections.
At that time, audio/video signals output from the
connected component (such as DVD player etc.) are
output to the connected video monitor only when this unit
is turned on and set to the input source (DVD or DTV/
CBL).
Furthermore, available audio/video signals depend on the
specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the
instruction manual of each connected component.
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
y
• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet)
with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit
to other DVI components.
You can record the audio signal output at the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jack by using the recording components.
Note
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc.
Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws.
Connecting video components
Information on jacks and cable plugs
COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
R
L
C
O
R
L
(White) (Red) (Orange)
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B
P
R
PB
Y
P
R
V
(Yellow) (Blue) (Red)(Green)
Composite
video cable
plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Information on HDMI™
Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output
from any speaker terminals but output from the
connected video monitor. To enjoy the sound from
speakers connected to this unit,
– make an analog or digital connection besides the
HDMI connection (see page 13).
– mute the volume of the connected video monitor.
Using the AUDIO OUT REC jack
PR
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
Input
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
HDMI
HDMI cable plug
12 En
Connections
Note
• If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, the connection may fail. In this case, the HDMI indicator
flashes irregularly.
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
LR
L
R
DOCK
VIDEO
MULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
SP
E
1
2
3
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CD
DTV/CBL
DTV/
CBL
SURROUND C
E
MONITOR
OUT
SUB
WOOFER
DVR
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
IN
OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
HDMI
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
MONITOR
OUT
Y
P
R
P
B
V
P
R
P
B
Y
LR
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
L
R
AUDIO
DVD DTV/CBL DVR CD
IN
OUT
TV
(or projector)
Component
video in
Video
in
Audio
out
HDMI
in
Recommended connections Alternative connections
13 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit has three types of audio jacks, two types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection
method depending on the component to be connected.
■ Connecting example (connecting a DVD player)
■ Jacks used for audio and video connections
Recommended connections are indicated by (*). When connecting a recording component, you need to make additional
connections for recording (signal transmission from this unit to the recording component).
y
• You can also use the VIDEO AUX jacks (see page 15) on the front panel
to connect an additional component.
• To confirm the positions of “jacks on this unit” in the following table,
refer to “Rear panel” in “Functional overview” on page 6.
Connecting other components
Connecting audio and video components
R
L
R
L
R
DOCK
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
AUDIOMULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
1
2
3
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CD
DTV/CBL
DTV/
CBL
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
S
U
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DVR
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DVR CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
Y
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
Y
L
R
C
V
Component out
Audio out
Video out
Coaxial out
HDMI out
Recommended connections Alternative connections
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
Component Signal type Jacks on component Jacks on this unit
DVD player or Blu-ray
Disc
Video HDMI out* HDMI (DVD)*
Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (DVD)
Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVD)
Audio Optical out* COAXIAL (DVD)*
Audio out (analog) AUDIO (DVD)
Set-top box Video HDMI out* HDMI (DTV/CBL)*
Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (DTV/CBL)
Video out (composite) VIDEO (DTV/CBL)
Audio Optical out* OPTICAL (DTV/CBL)*
Analog out (analog) AUDIO (DTV/CBL)
14 En
Connections
Notes
• Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV if the video conversion is disabled. For example, if you connected your
TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect other components to the VIDEO jacks.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default one assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, configure the
“INPUT ASSIGN” setting (see page 34).
• Only analog audio signals output at AUDIO OUT (REC) jack can be recorded using the recording components. Therefore Digital signals input at the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks or analog signals input at MULTI CH INPUT jacks can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jack for recording.
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks
(FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a
multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or
external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure
to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right
input jacks for the front and surround channels.
Notes
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks as the input source (see page 34), this unit automatically turns off
the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field
programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect a
5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot
be recorded.
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth
Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-10, sold
separately).
DVD recorder Video HDMI out* HDMI (DVR)*
Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVR IN)
Audio Audio out (analog)* AUDIO (IN (PLAY))*
Audio recording Audio in (analog)* AUDIO (OUT (REC))*
Video recording Video in (composite)* VIDEO (DVR OUT)*
CD player Audio Coaxial out* OPTICAL (CD)*
Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (CD)
MD or CD recorder Audio Audio out (analog)* AUDIO (IN (PLAY))*
Audio recording Audio in (analog)* AUDIO (OUT (REC))*
Component Signal type Jacks on component Jacks on this unit
Connecting a multi-format player or an
external decoder
L
R
L
R
MULTI CH INPUT
1
2
3
DVD
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DV
R
IN
L
R
L
R
Front out
Surround out
Subwoofer out
Center out
Multi-format player or
external decoder
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock
or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver
DOCK
DIGITAL INPUT
1
2
3
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
Yamaha iPod universal dock
or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver
15 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit. To reproduce
the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as
the input source.
Notes
• The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take
priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
• The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority over
the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks.
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
Notes
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an
indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor
antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center
about outdoor antennas.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor
AM antenna is connected to this unit.
Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna
Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna
Note
• The types of the supplied AM loop antenna is different depending on the
models.
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable
into the AC wall outlet.
Press ASTANDBY/ON (or dPOWER) to turn on
this unit.
y
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this
unit can reproduce sound.
Press ASTANDBY/ON (or cSTANDBY) to turn
off this unit.
Note
• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in
order to receive infrared signals from the remote control.
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
components before making connections.
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
D
EO
ANTENNA
R
SURR
O
AUDIO OUT
P
DVR
CD
S
N
OUT
DVR
AM
GND
FM
UNBAL.
75
N OUT
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft)
of vinyl-covered wire
extended outdoors from a
window.
AM loop
antenna
(supplied)
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
Ground
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
Connecting the power cable
Turning on and off the power
Turning on this unit
Set this unit to the standby mode
Open the
lever
Insert Close the
lever
L
Power cable
To the AC wall outlet
16 En
The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up
your system quickly and with minimal effort.
Notes
• Make sure that you disconnect your headphones from this unit.
• If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise
adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see
page 32).
• Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters
manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 32).
• Initial settings are indicated by (*) in the following each parameters.
• Press nRETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu
level.
1 Press hAMP on the remote control.
2 Press kMENU.
“BASIC SETUP” appears on the front panel display.
3 Press lENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP.”
“ROOM: S M L” appears on the front panel display.
4 Press ll / h to select the desired setting.
Select the size of the room where you have installed
your speakers. The room sizes are defined as follows:
5 Press ln to select “SUBWOOFER” and then
ll / h to select the desired setting.
“SUBWOOFER” and the current setting appear on
the front panel display.
6 Press ln to select “SPEAKERS” and then
ll / h to select the number of speakers
connected to this unit.
“SPEAKERS” and the current setting appear on the
front panel display.
7 Press ln to select “SET” and then ll / h
to select the desired settings.
“SET” and “CANCEL” appear on the front panel
display.
y
• You can also press kMENU to cancel the setup procedure.
8 Press lENTER to confirm your selection.
If you selected “SET” in step 7, each speaker outputs
a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears
on the front panel display for a few seconds and then
“CHECK OK?” appears on the front panel display.
y
• Check the speaker connections (see page 9) and adjust the
“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 6, if necessary.
• The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone
flashes on the front panel display.
9 Press ll / h to select the desired settings.
10 Press lENTER to confirm your selection.
• If you selected “YES” in step 9, the setup
procedure is completed and then display returns to
the top set menu display. Press kMENU to exit
from “BASIC SETUP.”
• If you selected “NO” in step 9, the front speaker
level adjustment display appears on the front panel
display.
11 Press lk / n to select a speaker and then
ll / h to adjust the balance.
The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the
surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn.
• Press lh to increase the value.
• Press ll to decrease the value.
■ The balance between speakers you can
adjust in each item is defined as follows.
Note
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the
speakers.
12 Press kMENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP.”
Basic setup
Choice Approximate Size of the room
S 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft
2
(4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m
2
)
M* 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft
2
(6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m
2
)
L 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft
2
(7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m
2
)
Choice Condition
YES* When you have a subwoofer in your system.
NONE When you do not have a subwoofer in your
system.
Choice Display Speakers
2spk Front L/R
3spk Front L/R Center
4spk Front L/R, Surround L/R
5spk* Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
LR
LCR
LR
SL SR
LCR
SL SR
Choice Function
SET Applies the settings you made.
CANCEL* Cancels the setup procedure without making
any changes.
Choice Function
YES* Completes the setup procedure if the test tone
levels from each speaker were satisfactory.
NO Proceeds to the speaker level adjustment menu
to balance the output level of each speaker.
Choice Adjusted balance between speakers
FR the front left and right speakers
C the front left and center speakers
SL the front left and surround left speakers
SR the surround left and surround right speakers
SWFR the front left speaker and the subwoofer
17 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
BASIC OPERATION
1 Turn on external components (TV, DVD
player, etc.) connected to this unit.
2 Press CSPEAKERS repeatedly to select the
front speakers you want to use.
The respective speaker indicators lights up on the
front panel display.
3 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
one of the input selector buttons (f)) to
select the desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears on the front panel display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the selected component or
select a broadcast station.
Notes
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source component.
• See page 27 for details about FM or AM tuning instructions.
y
• To adjust the level of each speaker, see page 19.
5 Rotate PVOLUME (or press mVOLUME +/–)
to adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
y
• See page 19 to adjust the level of each speaker.
• This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
• You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume level
(see page 34).
6 Press LPROGRAM l / h (or press hAMP
and then qPROG l / h) repeatedly to select
the desired sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
on the front panel display.
See page 21 for details about sound field programs.
Notes
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not
merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last
sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected
to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 18).
• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are
input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see
page 26).
• To display information about the currently selected input source on the
front panel display, see page 20 for details.
Playback
Caution
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.
Basic procedure
INPUT:DVD
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
Available input source
Currently selected input source
Movie Dramatic
Currently selected surround field program
18 En
Playback
Use the following features to select input jack or input
source.
■ Selecting the front speaker set
Press CSPEAKERS repeatedly change the
active front speaker set that is connected to the
FRONT A or FRONT B speaker terminals or turn
off the front speakers.
The active front speaker set changes as follows:
Note
• Turn off the volume level of this unit before you switch the front speaker
setting.
■ Using the Zone B feature
When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 32),
you can use the speakers connected to FRONT B speaker
terminals in another room (Zone B).
Press CSPEAKERS on the front panel
repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.
When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in
the main room are muted.
Notes
• You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers
simultaneously.
• If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate the Zone B
speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP is activated automatically (see page 26).
■ Selecting the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 14) as the input
source.
Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
hAMP and then press vMULTI CH IN) to
select “MULTI CH.”
“MULTI CH” appears on the front panel display.
y
• You can configure the multi channel input settings in “MULTI CH” (see
page 14).
Notes
• Sound field programs, or the night listening mode, etc. cannot be selected
when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source.
• When headphones are used, signals are output only from the front left
and right channels.
■ Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)
Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the
input jack assigned to an input source when two or more
jacks are assigned to an input source.
y
• We recommend that you set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” in
most cases.
• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using
“AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 36).
1 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
one of the input selector buttons (f)) to
select the desired input source.
2 Press hAMP and then wAUDIO SEL
repeatedly to select the desired Audio input
jack select setting.
y
• You can configure the audio input jack select setting in “AUDIO
SELECT.”
Note
• This feature is not available if no digital input jack is assigned to
the selected input source in “INPUT ASSIGN” (see page 34).
Guide to contents
When you want... See page
Adjust the tonal quality of the front
speakers
19
Edit parameters of sound field
programs
26
Enjoy the sources which have wide
dynamic range at night
19
Use headphones 19
Select a decoder to play back
sources with
26
Set this unit to the standby mode
automatically
20
Additional operations
Using input setting features
FRONT A FRONT B
OFF
Choice Function
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
A.SEL:AUTO
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
Audio input jack select setting
19 En
Playback
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use the following features to adjust the audio output or
speaker level.
■ Muting the audio output
Press eMUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press eMUTE again to resume
the audio output.
y
• You can also rotate PVOLUME (or press mVOLUME +/–) to
resume the audio output.
• You can configure the muting level by using “MUTE TYP.” in “SOUND
MENU” (see page 34).
• The MUTE indicator flashes on the front panel display when the audio
output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the
audio output is resumed.
■ Adjusting the tonal quality
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front left and right speaker channels.
Press KTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
“BASS” or “TREBLE” and then press
LPROGRAM l / h to adjust the corresponding
frequency response level.
Control range: –10 to +10 dB
Each choice is defined as follows.
Notes
• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency sound to
an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not
match that of the front left and right speakers.
• This does not affect recorded material.
■ Adjusting the speaker level
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Note
• This operation will override the level adjustment made in “SP LEVEL”
(see page 33).
1 Press hAMP and then press jBAND
LEVEL TITLE repeatedly to select the
speaker you want to adjust.
y
• Once you press jBAND LEVEL TITLE on the remote
control, you can also select the speaker by pressing lk / n.
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the speaker
settings.
2 Press ll / h on the remote control (or
press FPRESET/TUNING l / h) to adjust
the speaker output level.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Use the following features to utilize various useful
functions equipped on this unit.
■ Using your headphones
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
y
• When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode is
automatically activated (see page 26).
Notes
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker
terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and
right headphone channels.
■ Selecting the night listening mode
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night.
1 Press ONIGHT (or press hAMP and then
uNIGHT) repeatedly to select
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC.”
Each choice is defined as follows.
y
• When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator
lights up on the front panel display.
2 Press ll / h to adjust the effect level while
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is
displayed on the front panel display.
Each choice is defined as follows.
Using audio features
Choice Function
BASS Adjusts the low-frequency response.
TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response.
Choice Description
FRONT L Front left speaker
FRONT R Front right speaker
CENTER Center speaker
SWFR Subwoofer
SUR.L Surround left speaker
SUR.R Surround right speaker
Using optional features
Choice Function
NIGHT:CINEMA Narrows the dynamic range of film
soundtracks and makes dialog easier to
hear at lower volumes.
NIGHT:MUSIC Preserves ease-of-listening for all
sounds.
NIGHT OFF Disables this feature.
Choice Function
MIN Slightly lowers the effect level.
MID* Moderately lowers the effect level.
MAX Considerably lowers the effect level.
20 En
Playback
y
• “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored
independently.
Notes
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source.
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher than 48
kHz.
• The effect of night listening modes may vary depending on the input
source and surround sound settings you use.
■ Displaying the input source information
(SIGNAL INFO)
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Press hAMP and then press kMENU on
the remote control.
“BASIC SETUP” appears on the front panel display.
2 Press lk / n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL
INFO” and then press lENTER.
3 Press lk / n to switch the displayed
information.
The following information about the input source
appears on the front panel display.
4 Press kMENU on the remote control again
to exit from “SET MENU.”
■ Using the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording from a source.
Press hAMP and then press xSLEEP
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
The sleep timer setting changes as follows.
Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up
on the front panel display, and the display returns to the
selected sound field program.
To cancel the sleep timer
Press xSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to
select “SLEEP OFF.”
y
• If you set the main zone to the standby mode, the sleep timer is
automatically canceled.
■ Playing video sources in the background
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons (f) on the
remote control to select a video source and then
an audio source.
Choice Description
FORMAT Signal format.
SAMPLING The number of samples per second
taken from a continuous signal to
make discrete signals.
CHANNEL The number of source channels in the
input signal (front/surround/LFE).
BITRATE The number of bits passing a given
point per second.
FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby
Digital, or PCM signals that cue this
unit to automatically switch decoders.
;BASIC SETUP
SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL DVR
DVD
DVD
MULTI CH IN
9
Audio sources
Video sources
Video sources
Audio sources
21 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can recall your
favorite input source and sound field program according to
the SCENE template that has been assigned to the SCENE
button. The SCENE templates are built combinations of
input sources and sound field programs.
This unit is equipped with 13 preset SCENE templates for
various situations. The following SCENE templates are
assigned to respective SCENE buttons in the default
settings.
Notes
*1 You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in advance.
See page 13 for details.
*2 You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this unit in
advance. See page 15 for details.
*3 You have to tune into the desired radio station. See pages 27 to 28 for
the tuning information.
*4 To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop
antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna.
If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select
the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template
library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE
buttons on the front panel and the remote control.
1 Press and hold the desired JSCENE (or
iSCENE) button for 3 seconds.
The MEMORY indicator on the front panel starts to
flash, and the name of currently assigned SCENE
template appears on the front panel display.
2 Press NINPUT l / h (or press hAMP and
then ll / h) to select the desired template.
3 Press the JSCENE (or iSCENE) button
again to confirm the selection.
The MEMORY indicator stops flashing and the select
SCENE template is assigned to the button.
y
• To cancel the procedure, press hAMP and then nRETURN.
Note
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding
SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE
template on the remote control. See page 24 for details.
Selecting the SCENE templates
Default SCENE
button
The name of the SCENE template and
its description
SCENE 1
DVD Viewing
– input source: DVD
– sound field program: STRAIGHT
For when you want to enjoy a DVD
playback.
SCENE 2
Disc Listening
– input source: DVD
– sound field program: 5ch Stereo
For when you want to listen to a music disc
from the connected DVD player as the
background music for this room.
SCENE 3
TV Viewing *1
– input source: DTV/CBL
– sound field program: STRAIGHT
For when you want to watch a TV program.
SCENE 4
Radio Listening *2, *3, *4
– input source: TUNER
– sound field program: Music Enh. 5ch
For when you want to listen to a music
program from the FM radio station.
Selecting the desired SCENE template
1
Select the desired SCENE template
SCENE template library
(Image)
Assign the
SCENE template
to the SCENE
button
DVD Viewing
DVD Movie View
22 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
The following tables indicate preset SCENE template descriptions. Select the corresponding SCENE templates for the
desired source. The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate that the SCENE templates in those
cells are assigned to the SCENE buttons, respectively.
You can also create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 23 for details.
■ Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video)
■ Music discs (CD, SA-CD or DVD-Audio)
■ Radio programs
■ iPod or Bluetooth component
■ TV programs
Which SCENE template would you like to select?
SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features
DVD Viewing DVD STRAIGHT
Select this SCENE template when you play back
general contents on your DVD player.
DVD Movie Viewing DVD Movie Dramatic
Select this SCENE template when you play back
movies on your DVD player.
DVD Live Viewing DVD Pop/Rock
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy music
live video on your DVD player.
DVR Viewing DVR Movie Dramatic
Select this SCENE template when you play back
movies on your digital video recorder.
SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features
Music Disc Listening DVD 2ch Stereo
Select this SCENE template when you play back
music discs on your DVD player.
Disc Listening DVD 5ch Stereo
Select this SCENE template when you play back
music sources as the back ground music on your
DVD player.
CD Listening CD 5ch Stereo
Select this SCENE template when you play back
music source as the back ground music on your CD
player.
CD Music Listening CD 2ch Stereo
Select this SCENE template when you play back
music discs on your CD player.
SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features
Radio Listening TUNER Music Enh. 5ch
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or
AM radio programs.
SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features
Dock Listening DOCK Music Enh. 5ch
Select this SCENE template when you play back
music on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod
universal dock or Bluetooth component that is
connected to the Bluetooth receiver.
SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features
TV Viewing DTV/CBL STRAIGHT
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy TV
programs.
TV Sports Viewing DTV/CBL TV Sports
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports
programs on TV.
1
2
4
3
23 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Video games
Note
• When an iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth receiver, this unit plays back the
audio sources input at the DOCK terminal.
You can create your original SCENE templates for each
SCENE button. Refer to the preset 13 SCENE templates
to create the original SCENE templates.
Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates.
1 Press and hold the desired iSCENE button
for 3 seconds and then press hAMP.
The MEMORY indicator on the front panel starts to
flash.
Note
• When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned
to any of the iSCENE button, press ll / h repeatedly to
recall the desired SCENE template (see page 21).
2 Press lk / n to select the desired parameter
of the SCENE template and then ll / h to
select the desired value of the selected
parameter.
You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE
template:
• The input source component
• The active sound field programs or STRAIGHT
mode
• The night listening mode setting (see page 19)
– SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening
mode.
– CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the
CINEMA mode.
– MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the
MUSIC mode.
3 Press the iSCENE button again to confirm
the edit.
y
• An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE
template.
• To cancel the procedure, press hAMP and then nRETURN.
Notes
• After changing the assignment of the SCENE template to the iSCENE
buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on
the remote control. See page 24 for details.
• You can create a customized SCENE template for each iSCENE
button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit
overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one.
• The customized SCENE template is only available for the assigned
iSCENE button.
SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features
Game Playing V-AUX Game
Select this SCENE template when you play video
games.
Creating your original SCENE
templates
Customizing the preset SCENE templates
: DVD Viewing
: DVD
SCENE
INPUT
SCENE : DVD Viewing
1
Select the desired SCENE
template
Create an original SCENE
template
SCENE template library
(Image)
Assign the SCENE
template to the SCENE
button
AMP
1
3 seconds
1
24 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
You can operate both this unit and the input source
component by using the remote control. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
advance (see page 39).
1 Press the desired iSCENE button on the
remote control.
2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below
to control the input source component of the
selected SCENE template.
Note
• These buttons control the input source component. See page 37 for
details of the function of each button.
If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE
template, you must set the input source of the SCENE
template on the remote control to operate the input source
component correctly.
Press and hold the iSCENE button and the
desired input selector button (f) for 3 seconds.
y
• Press the iSCENE button again to operate the input source
component.
Using remote control on the SCENE
feature
Controlling the input source components
in the SCENE mode
Setting input source of the customized
SCENE template on the remote control
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
D E
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
*
SCENE buttons
25 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital
decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback
from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source.
This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound
field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field
programs which you can use to enhance your playback
experience.
Press LPROGRAM l / h (or press hAMP and
then press qPROG l / h repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears on
the front panel display.
Notes
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last
sound field program used with corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected
to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 18).
• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are
input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see
page 26).
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not
merely on the name of the program itself.
• You can select “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music Enh. 5ch” by pressing
rENHANCER repeatedly.
y
• Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
• The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers.
Sound field programs
Selecting sound field programs
Sound field program descriptions
Category Program Features
MUSIC
Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The
sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of
vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments.
Hall CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The
program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful
reverberation and a majestic atmosphere.
Jazz CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music.
It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation.
ENTERTAIN
Game CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games.
The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where
you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies.
TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with
a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come
clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a
comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium.
MOVIE
Movie Spacious CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular
sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic
range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds.
Movie Dramatic CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on three-
dimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound
effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center
orientation of voices as pivots.
STEREO
2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are.
5ch Stereo CINEMA DSP processing. Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a
sound field suitable for background music at parties.
ENHANCER
Music Enh. 2ch
Music Enh. 5ch
Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or
5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact.
26 En
Sound field programs
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources
(surround decode mode)
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multi-channels.
Press hAMP and then press sSUR. DECODE
repeatedly to select a decoder.
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.
■ Editing sound field parameters
Although you can enjoy good quality sound with the
factory default parameters, you can change some of the
parameters to better suit the input source or your listening
room.
1 While listening to a source, press hAMP
and then press lk / n to select desired
parameter.
2 Press ll / h to change the parameter
value.
Note
• You cannot change parameter values when “MEM.GUARD” in
“OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 35).
y
• Initial settings are indicated by (*) in the following each parameter.
For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports, Movie
Spacious and Movie Dramatic:
For PRO LOGIC II Music:
For Music Enh. 2ch and Music Enh. 5ch
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP sound field programs without surround speakers.
When you set “SUR. L/R” to “NONE” (see page 33),
Virtual CINEMA DSP is activated automatically
whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program
(see page 25).
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound
field programs with headphones (SILENT
CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound through ordinary headphones.
SILENT CINEMA is activated automatically whenever
you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while
listening to CINEMA DSP sound field programs (see
page 25).
y
• When it is activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decoding mode)
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
Press MSTRAIGHT (or press hAMP and then
tSTRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT.”
“STRAIGHT” appears on the front panel display.
To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode
Press MSTRAIGHT (or tSTRAIGHT) again so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display.
STANDARD Function
PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources
PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie
sources
PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music
sources
PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game
sources
DSP level DSP LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the effect level.
Choices: MIN, MID*, MAX
Panorama PANORAMA
Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround
speakers as well as the front speakers for a
wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF*, ON
Dimension DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either
towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the
front), initial setting is STD (standard).
Center width CT WIDTH
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front
speakers to varying degrees. A larger value
adjusts the center image towards the front
left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from
center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is
output only from front left and right
speakers), initial setting is 3.
Effect level
Function: Adjusts the effect level.
Choices: LOW, HIGH*
27 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can use two tuning modes to tune into a desired FM/
AM station:
■ Frequency tuning mode
You can search or specify the frequency of the desired
FM/AM station automatically or manually (see “FM/AM
tuning operations” on this page).
■ Preset tuning mode
You can preset the desired FM/AM station in advance, and
then recall the station by specifying the preset group and
number (see “Selecting preset stations” on page 28).
Note
• Orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end
of the indoor FM antenna for the best reception.
1 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed on the front panel
display.
2 Press GBAND to select the reception band
(FM or AM).
3 To search the station automatically, press
ITUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO
indicator lights up on the front panel display.
To search the station manually, press
ITUNING AUTO/MAN’L again so that the
AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears on the front panel display,
automatic/manual tuning is not possible. Press
DEDIT PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:)
off.
4 To begin automatic tuning, press
FPRESET/TUNING l / h once. To tune
into the desired station manually, press
FPRESET/TUNING l / h repeatedly.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown on the front panel display.
• To tune into a higher frequency, press
FPRESET/TUNING h.
• To tune into a lower frequency, press FPRESET/
TUNING l.
Note
• If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it
manually.
Use this feature to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8
preset station numbers in each of 5 preset station groups).
Preset the desired stations to this unit by using the
automatic or manual station preset.
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 FM stations with strong signals in order.
1 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed on the front panel
display.
2 Press GBAND to select “FM” as the
reception band.
3 Press and hold HMEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting status from the current
frequency and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
FM/AM tuning
Overview
FM/AM tuning operations
AUTO
A
AM
1440
kHz
Lights up during automatic tuning
No colon (:)
Preset FM/AM stations
Automatic station preset
AUTO
TUNED
A
AM
1530
kHz
Lights up
AUTO
MEMORY
A1:FM 87.5 MHz
Flashes
Flashes
28 En
FM/AM tuning
y
• You can select the preset station group and the preset station number
where the first received station will be stored by pressing EA/B/C/D/E
and then FPRESET/TUNING l / h.
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared
when you store a new station under the same preset station number.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically
by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in
signal strength, tune it manually and store it as described in “Manual
station preset” on this page.
Use this feature to store the FM or AM stations manually.
1 Tune into a station.
See page 27 for using instructions.
2 Press HMEMORY.
The MEMORY indicator flashes on the front panel
display for approximately 30 seconds.
3 Press EA/B/C/D/E and FPRESET/TUNING
l / h repeatedly to select a preset station
group and number (A1 to E8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Check that the colon (:) appears on the front panel
display.
• To select a higher preset station group and number,
press FPRESET/TUNING h.
• To select a lower preset station group and number,
press FPRESET/TUNING l.
4 Press HMEMORY while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear on the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected.
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it is
stored.
1 Press EA/B/C/D/E (or ll / h) repeatedly to
select the desired preset station group (A to
E).
The preset station group letter appears on the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
2 Press FPRESET/TUNING l / h (or lk /
n) to select the desired preset station
number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number, along with
station band and frequency, appear on the front panel
display.
y
• You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly by
pressing the numeric buttons (y).
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
between the two. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” and “A5.”
1 Select preset station “E1” using EA/B/C/D/E
and FPRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.
2 Press and hold DEDIT PRESET/TUNING
for more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash on the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using EA/B/C/D/E
and FPRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash on the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.
4 Press DEDIT PRESET/TUNING again.
“EXCHANGE E1-A5” appears on the front panel
display and the assignments of the two preset stations
are exchanged.
Manual station preset
Selecting preset stations
When performing this operation with the remote
control, press fTUNER to select “TUNER” as the
input source.
TUNED
MEMORY
:
C3
AM
630
kHz
Flashes
Preset station group and number
TUNED
:
C3
AM
630
kHz
The displayed station has been stored as C3.
Exchanging preset stations
:
E1
FM
87.5
MHz
MEMORY
:
E1
FM
87.5
MHz
Flashes
Flashes
MEMORY
:
A5
FM
90.5
MHz
Flashes
Flashes
29 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 14), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
■ Supported iPod
iPod (Click Wheel, including iPod classic)
iPod nano
iPod mini
iPod touch
■ Battery charge feature
Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on.
■ Stationing your iPod to the Yamaha iPod universal dock
Once you station your iPod to the Yamaha iPod universal dock, “iPod connected” and the DOCK indicator appears on the
front panel display when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source.
Notes
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. Refer to the instruction manuals of your iPod for the operations on your iPod.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 44.
Using iPod™
Control and functions for iPod™
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
D E
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
V-AUX/DOCK
MENUTITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
REC
V-AUX/DOCK
Selects “V-AUX” or “DOCK” as the input source.
MENU/Cursor buttons (k / n / l / h) / ENTER
Navigates the menu of your iPod.
• Press kMENU or ll to move to the previous
menu level.
• Press lk / n to move to the upper/lower menu level.
• Press lENTER or lh to move to the subsequent
menu, start playback of the selected menu level, or
change the selected setting.
Playback control buttons
Navigates the menu of your iPod.
p/e: Play/pause
s: Stop
w / f: Search backward/forward
b / a: Skip backward/forward
30 En
You can connect a Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this
unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring
between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” for the connected Bluetooth receiver and
your Bluetooth component in advance.
Pairing must be performed when you use a Bluetooth
component with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this
unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been
deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a
Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.
y
• You need to perform the pairing operation only when you use the
Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth receiver for the first time.
• You need to perform the pairing operations both on this unit and on the
Bluetooth component. If necessary, refer to operating instructions of the
Bluetooth component.
There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START
PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing.
■ Pairing by using “SET MENU”
Use this feature to perform pairing of this unit and the
video monitor. Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT
MENU.” See page 36 for details.
■ Quick pairing
1 Press hAMP and then press NINPUT l /
h repeatedly (or press fV-AUX/DOCK) to
select “V-AUX” as the input source.
2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with.
3 Press and hold GBAND (or jBAND LEVEL
TITLE) for 3 seconds.
Once the Bluetooth receiver starts pairing,
“Searching...” appears for a moment. While the
Bluetooth receiver is in the pairing mode, DOCK
indicator flashes on the front panel display.
y
• To cancel the pairing, press GBAND (or jBAND LEVEL
TITLE) again.
Note
• If the Bluetooth receiver is not connected to the DOCK terminal of
this unit, “No BT adapter” appears on the front panel display.
4 Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth receiver.
If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth
receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in
the Bluetooth device list.
5 Select the Bluetooth receiver in the
Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass
key “0000” to the Bluetooth component.
When the pairing is completed successfully,
“Completed” appears on the front panel display.
Note
• The Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver can be paired with up to eight
other components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth
component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for the least
recently used other component is cleared.
1 Press hAMP and then press NINPUT l /
h repeatedly (or press fV-AUX/DOCK) to
select “V-AUX” as the input source.
2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component.
When the connected Bluetooth receiver detects the
Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the
DOCK indicator appears on the front panel display.
y
• When you press lENTER on the remote control, the connected
Bluetooth receiver searches and connect to the last connected Bluetooth
component. If the Bluetooth receiver cannot find the Bluetooth
component, “Not found” appears on the front panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth receiver from the Bluetooth component,
press nRETURN.
Using Bluetooth™ components
Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and
your Bluetooth™ component
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read
and fully understand all the instructions before starting.
Playback of the Bluetooth™
component
31 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
You can use the following parameters in the set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 16).
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
■ Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
■ Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
■ Option menu 3 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 20).
Set menu
Basic setup BASIC SETUP
Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Parameter Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover frequency,
and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals.
32
B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 33
C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the distance of each speaker. 33
D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 33
E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 34
F)D.RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 34
G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay settings, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 34
Parameter Features Page
A)INPUT ASSIGN Assigns the input jacks on this unit according to the component to be used. 34
B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 34
C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 35
D)DECODER MODE Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of
this unit.
35
E)MULTI CH SET Select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 35
Parameter Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display. 35
B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other set menu settings. 35
C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
36
D)PARAM. INI Sets all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. 36
E)BLUETOOTH Pairs the connected Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a
Bluetooth component (see page 30).
36
Signal information SIGNAL INFO
32 En
Set menu
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
• You can change the set menu parameters while this unit is reproducing
sound.
1 Press hAMP and then press kMENU on
the remote control.
“BASIC SETUP” appears on the front panel display.
2 Press lk / n to select “MANUAL SETUP.”
3 Press lENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP.”
“1 SOUND MENU” appears on the front panel
display.
4 Press lk / n repeatedly and then press
lENTER to select and enter the desired
menu.
The following menus appear on the front panel
display as you press lk / n repeatedly.
5 Press lk / n repeatedly and then press
lENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
• Repeat this step to navigate to and enter the items
you want to adjust.
• To return to the previous menu level, press
nRETURN.
6 Press lk / n to select the desired parameter
and then ll / h to change the parameter
value.
• Press lh to increase the value.
• Press ll to decrease the value.
7 Press kMENU to exit from set menu.
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using
LCD monitors or projectors.
y
• Initial settings are indicated by (*) in this following each parameter.
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
■ FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the FRONT B terminals.
Notes
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the sound is
output from both headphones and the FRONT B terminals while
“FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B.”
• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B,” this
unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 26).
■ Front speakers, Center speaker, Surround
left/right speakers
FRONT, CENTER, SUR. LR
Select “LARGE (LRG)” or “SMALL (SML)” depending
on the size of your each speaker. When Center speaker or
Surround speakers is not connected, select “NONE.”
Initial setting:
FRONT: “LARGE”
CENTER: “SML”
SUR. LR: “SML”
Notes
• When “BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 32), you can select only
“LARGE” in “FRONT.” If “FRONT” is set to a setting other than
“LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to
“LARGE.”
• When you select “NONE” in “CENTER,” the center channel signals are
directed to the front left and right speakers.
• When you select “NONE” in “SUR. LR,” this unit is automatically enters
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 26).
■ LFE/Bass out BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
y
• If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can
change these settings according to your preference.
Using set menu
MANUAL SETUP
.
1 SOUND MENU
1 SOUND MENU
2 INPUT MENU
3 OPTION MENU
1 SOUND MENU
Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Choice Condition
FRONT* When FRONT B speakers are set in the main zone.
ZONE B When FRONT B speakers are set in another zone. This
setting mutes all the speakers in the main room when
FRONT B is selected by CSPEAKERS.
Woofer diameter of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or
larger: large
Woofer diameter of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm
(6.5 in): small
33 En
Set menu
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
LFE signals output
Low-frequency signals output
Notes
*1 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the front channels and other
speakers to “SML” or “NONE.”
*2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front channels.
*3 Output the low-frequency signals if the sizes of speakers are set to
“LARGE” (or “LRG”).
*4 Output the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to “SML.”
■ Crossover CROSSOVER
Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 31 and 32).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz*, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Note
• All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the
subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER
SET” (see pages 31 and 32).
■ Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each
speaker.
Control range: –10 to 0* to +10 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Notes
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the
speakers.
• This does not affect recorded material.
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
All sounds would be adjusted to arrive at the listening
position at the same time regardless of distance from each
speaker.
■ Unit UNIT
■ Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Initial setting:
FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)
SUR. L/SUR. R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
Note
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the
speakers.
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band
(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers.
Control range: –6.0 to 0* to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
y
• Press lk / n to select a frequency band and ll / h to adjust the
selected frequency band.
• You can make adjustment while listening to the currently source or a test
tone.
Following is an example where “100Hz” is selected as the
frequency band.
Choice Subwoofer Front speakers Other speakers
BOTH* Output No output No output
SWFR Output No output No output
FRONT No output Output No output
Choice Subwoofer Front speakers Other speakers
BOTH**1 *2 *3
SWFR *4 *3 *3
FRONT No output *1 *3
Choice Function
NRM* Does not reverse the phase of your subwoofer.
REV Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse.
Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker
FL Front left speaker
FR Front right speaker
C Center speaker
SL Surround left speaker
SR Surround right speaker
SWFR Subwoofer
Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Choice Condition
meters When you adjust speaker distances in meters.
feet* When you adjust speaker distances in feet.
SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker
FRONT L Front left speaker
FRONT R Front right speaker
CENTER Center speaker
SUR. L Surround left speaker
SUR. R Surround right speaker
SWFR Subwoofer
Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
100Hz--||-- 0
34 En
Set menu
■ Test tone TEST
Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”
while listening to a test tone.
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones.
Control range: –20 to 0* dB
Control step: 1 dB
■ Speaker LFE SP LFE
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
■ Headphone LFE HP LFE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Notes
• Depending on the settings of “BASS OUT” (see page 32), some signals
may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack.
• The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only
added to certain scenes.
• This setting is effective when the input signal contains the LFE channel.
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
■ Speaker dynamic range SP D.R
Adjusts the speaker compression.
■ Headphone dynamic range HP D.R
Adjusts the headphone compression.
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
■ Mute type MUTE TYP.
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 19).
■ Audio delay A.DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary for certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0* to 160 ms
Control step: 1 ms
■ Maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level
regardless of the original volume range. This feature is
useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound.
Control range: +16 dB*, +10 dB to –30 dB
Control step: 5 dB
Note
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume”
setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX VOL.” is
set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30 dB when you
turn on the power of this unit next time.
■ Initial volume INI.VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of
this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off*, –80 dB to +16 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Note
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.” setting.
Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the input
mode or rename the input source.
y
• Initial settings are indicated by (*) in this following each parameter.
Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the
component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do
not correspond to your needs.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
Initial setting:
IN (1) (COAXIAL jack): DVD
IN (2) (OPTICAL (DTV/CBL) jack): DTV/CBL
IN (3) (OPTICAL (CD) jack): CD
Notes
• You cannot select a specific item more than once.
• You cannot assign the same input source to both “IN (2)” and “IN (3).”
For example, you assign “CD” to “IN (2),” “–––” appears in “IN (3).”
• Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding
component by using NINPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons
(f) on the remote control).
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears on the front panel display.
Choice Function
OFF* Stops test tones and output the currently.
ON Outputs test tones from the center and from left
speakers.
Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Dynamic range F)D.RANGE
Choice Function
MIN Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow.
STD Adjusts the dynamic range to medium.
MAX* Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.
Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Choice Function
FULL* Completely mutes all the audio output.
-20dB Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.
2 INPUT MENU
Input assignment A)INPUT ASSIGN
Input rename B)INPUT RENAME
35 En
Set menu
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The following is an example where “DVD” is renamed
“My DVD.”
1 Press one of the input selector buttons (f)
or vMULTI CH IN to select the input
source you want to change the name of.
2 Press hAMP and then press ll / h on the
remote control to place the “_” (underscore)
under the space or the character you want to
edit.
3 Press lk / n to select the character you
want to use and then press ll / h to move
to the next space.
Notes
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press ln to change the character in the following order, or press
lk to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +,
etc.)
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
5 Press kMENU to exit from “INPUT
RENAME.”
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Press one of the input selector buttons (f) or
vMULTI CH IN to select the input source you
want to adjust the level.
Choices: CD, TUNER, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX (DOCK), DVR, MULTI CH IN
Control range: –6.0 to 0.0* to +6.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
■ Decoder select mode
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for
the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT
jacks.
■ DTS decoder prioritize setting
■ BGV BGV
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
Choices: LAST*, DVR, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, DVD
y
• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected
video source as the background video source.
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
y
• Initial settings are indicated by (*) in this following each parameter.
■ Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: –4 to 0*
Control step: 1
• Press ll to make the front panel display dimmer.
• Press lh to make the front panel display brighter.
■ Memory guard MEM.GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Note
• When “MEM.GUARD” is set to “ON,” you cannot select and adjust any
other set menu items.
Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM
Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE
Choice Function
AUTO* Automatically detect the type of input signals and
selects the appropriate decoder mode.
LAST Automatically select the last decoder mode used the
connected input source.
DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
DVD My DVD
Choice Function
AUTO* Automatically detect the type of input signals and
selects the appropriate input mode.
DTS Enables to playback a DTS-CD.
Multi channel input setup
E)MULTI CH SET
3 OPTION MENU
Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Choice Function
OFF* Turns off the “MEM.GUARD” feature.
ON Protects:
– sound field program parameters
– all set menu items
– SCENE template parameters
36 En
Set menu
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
select setting for the input sources.
Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field
programs to the initial factory settings.
Notes
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once
you initialize the sound field program parameters.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs.
■ Start pairing START PAIRING
Use this feature to start pairing the connected Bluetooth
Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-10, sold
separately) with your Bluetooth component. For details
about the pairing, refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™
receiver and your Bluetooth™ component” on page 30.
1 Select “START PAIRING” in “BLUETOOTH”
and then press lENTER to start pairing.
The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching
Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears on the
front panel display.
2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth receiver.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
Bluetooth component.
3 Select the Bluetooth receiver in the
Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass
key “0000” on the Bluetooth component.
Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,
“Completed” appears.
y
• To cancel the pairing, press nRETURN to exit from “START
PAIRING.”
4 Press nRETURN to exit from “START
PAIRING.”
Notes
• If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any Bluetooth
components, “Not found” appears.
• If a Bluetooth receiver is not connected to this unit, “No BT adapter”
appears.
Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT
Choice Function
AUTO* Automatically detect the type of input signals and
select the appropriate input mode.
LAST Automatically select the last input mode used for the
connected input source (see page 18).
Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI
Choice Function
NO* Cancels the parameter initialization and returns to the
previous menu level.
YES Sets all the sound field parameters to the initial factory
settings.
Bluetooth setting E)BLUETOOTH
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read
and fully understand all the instructions before starting.
37 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 39).
-
■ Controlling this unit
Press hAMP to control this unit.
Notes
*1 These buttons always control this unit.
*2 These buttons control this unit only when hAMP is pressed.
■ Controlling a TV
Press fDTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your
TV, set the appropriate remote control code for fDTV/
CBL (see page 39).
Notes
*1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether you press
fDTV/CBL or not.
*2 These buttons control your TV only when fDTV/CBL is pressed.
For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on page 38.
y
• You can control more than one TV by setting the appropriate remote
control code for any input source selector buttons other than fDTV/
CBL. In such a case, you can control the buttons highlighted above (*1
and *2) when you press the input source selector button.
Remote control features
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
D E
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
AMP
*2
*1
*2
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER Turns on or off the power.
TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.
TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV INPUT Changes the input source.
TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
D E
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
DTV/CBL
*2
*1
38 En
Remote control features
■ Controlling other components
Press one of the input selector buttons (f) or A to E
buttons to control other components. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
advance (see page 39). The following table shows the
function of each control button used to control other
components assigned to each input selector button. Be
advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the
selected component.
y
• The remote control has 13 modes (input areas) to control components so
that the remote control can operate up to 13 different components.
• When you press one of the optional component control area buttons (A to
E), you can control the desired component without changing the input
source of this unit.
Notes
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2 These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 39).
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
D E
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
[1]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Remote control
DVD player/
recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
LD player CD player
MD/CD
recorder
Tuner
[1] AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1
[2] TITLE Title Band
[3] PRESET/CH k Up VCR channel
up
Up Preset up
(1-8)
PRESET/CH n Down VCR channel
down
Down Preset down
(1-8)
A/B/C/D/E l Left Left Preset down
(A-E)
A/B/C/D/E h Right Right Preset up
(A-E)
ENTER Enter Enter
[4] RETURN Return Return
[5] REC Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec Rec *2 Disc skip Rec
p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play
w Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward *2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
f Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward *2
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause
b Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward *2
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
*2
Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop
[6] 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Preset stations
(1-8)
[7] MENU Menu Menu
[8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display
[9] ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index
39 En
Remote control features
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
Remote control code default settings
Note
• You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a
Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try
setting another Yamaha remote control code.
1 While pressing and holding one of the input
selector buttons (f) on the remote control to
select the input area you want to set up,
press bAV POWER for more than 3
seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (y) to
enter the four-digit remote control code for
the component to be used.
When the setting succeeds, “RemoteSetup OK”
appears; however, when it dues not, “RemoteSetup
NG” appears on the front panel display.
Notes
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each
of them until you find the correct one.
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the setup
process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure.
■ Resetting all remote control codes
Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes
previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory
settings.
1 While pressing and holding hAMP, press
bAV POWER for more than 3 seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons (y) to enter the
code number “9981.”
“RemoteSetup OK” appears on the front panel
display, and the remote control codes previously set
are cleared and reset to the initial factory settings.
y
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 1, the
clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing
procedure.
Setting remote control codes
Input
source
Component
category
Manufacturer
Default
code
CD CD Yamaha 5013
MD/CD-R CD-R Yamaha 5001
TUNER TUNER Yamaha 5007
DVD DVD Yamaha 2000
DTV/CBL — — —
V-AUX/
DOCK
TUNER Yamaha 5011
DVR DVR Yamaha 2011
A TUNER Yamaha 5012
B TUNER Yamaha 5009
C TUNER Yamaha 5017
D— ——
E— ——
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
D E
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
A B C
POWER
AV
While holding down
Press for 3 seconds
POWER
AV
AMP
While holding down
Press for 3 seconds
40 En
This unit has additional menus that are displayed on the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated by (*) in this
following parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Notes
• Only
A
STANDBY/ON,
L
PROGRAM l / h and
M
STRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
• No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available on the front panel display.
1 Press
A
STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
set this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold
K
TONE CONTROL and
then press
A
STANDBY/ON to turn on this
unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears on the front panel display.
3 Press
L
PROGRAM l / h to select the
parameter you want to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears on the
front panel display.
4 Press
M
STRAIGHT repeatedly to change
the selected parameter setting.
5 Press
A
STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
y
• The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit.
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8ΩMIN*, 6ΩMIN
• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
■ Initializing PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings.
Choices: CANCEL*, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
Notes
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the
set menu parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will
not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
Advanced setup
Caution
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit.
SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level
8ΩMIN
Front (A or B) The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Center
Surround
6ΩMIN
Front (A or B) The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Center
Surround
41 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly. —
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 40
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
9
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
11-13
No appropriate Audio input jack select has
been set.
Set an appropriate Audio input jack select. 36
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
N
INPUT l / h on the front panel (or the input
selector buttons (f) on the remote control).
17, 18
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 9
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with CSPEAKERS.18
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. —
The sound is muted. Press eMUTE or mVOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output and then adjust the
volume.
19
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are
not output from any speaker terminals.
Make an analog or digital connection beside the
HDMI connection.
—
The setting of the connected component is
improper.
Make an appropriate setting following the instruction
manual of the connected component.
—
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance setting is correct. 40
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. —
The sound is muted. Press eMUTE or mVOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output.
19
42 En
Troubleshooting
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
11-14
Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL.” Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. 33
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to
“NONE.”
Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG.” 32
Some sound field programs do not output
sounds from the center speaker.
Try another sound field program. 25
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. LR” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to
“NONE.”
Set “SUR. LR” to “SML” or “LRG.” 32
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press
M
STRAIGHT on the front panel so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
26
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set
to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Set “BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH.” 32
“BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set
to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Set “BASS OUT” to “BOTH.” 32
The source does not contain low-
frequency bass signals.
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator on
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANA LOG.”
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO.” 18
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
You are attempting to set the volume level
higher than the maximum volume level.
Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting. 34
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jack on this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power of the component. —
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jack.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks on this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
13
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
43 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Tuner
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEM.GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is
set to “ON.”
Set “MEM.GUARD” to “OFF.” 35
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears on the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 9
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment. —
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature is too high and
the overheat protection circuitry has been
activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
Virtual CINEMA DSP
is not activated.
“MULTI CH” is selected as the input
source.
Select an input source other than “MULTI CH.” 17
Headphones are connected to the
PHONES jack.
Disconnect the headphone plug from the PHONES
jack.
—
This unit is in the “5ch Stereo” mode. Exit from the “5ch Stereo” mode. 21
SILENT CINEMA is
not activated.
“MULTI CH” is selected as the input
source.
Select an input source other than “MULTI CH.” 17
The unit is in the “2ch Stereo,”
“STRAIGHT” or “Music Enh.2ch” mode.
Exit from the “2ch Stereo,” “STRAIGHT” or “Music
Enh2ch” mode.
21
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections. 15
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method. 27
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. —
Use the manual tuning method. 27
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Set preset stations. 27
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
44 En
Troubleshooting
■ iPod
Note
• In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display, check the connection to your iPod (see page 14).
■ Bluetooth
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and
orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method. 27
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect error There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
14
Try resetting your iPod. —
Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
—
iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11,
sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
14
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Searching... The Bluetooth receiver and the Bluetooth
component is in the middle of the pairing.
The Bluetooth receiver and the Bluetooth
component is in the middle of establishing
the connection.
Completed The paring is completed.
Canceled The paring is canceled.
BT connected The connection between the Bluetooth
Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-
10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth
component is established.
Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected
from the Bluetooth receiver (such as
YBA-10, sold separately).
No BT adapter The Bluetooth receiver is not connected to
the DOCK terminal.
Connect the Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such
as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal.
14
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
45 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Remote control
■ Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. For details about the procedure of
resetting the system, see “Initializing” in “Advanced setup” on page 40.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
8
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit. —
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 8
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
39
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
39
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
46 En
■ Audio information
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels
(front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital
provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel
especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the
system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By
using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate
moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible
than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum
to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With
this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast
numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology
enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right
channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels
instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music
sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to
reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right
channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a
surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround
channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby
Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic
decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system
that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance
moving sound effects and directionality.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks
of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly
gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has
developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in
your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-
channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround
channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-
channels).
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals. The frequency
range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted
as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the
full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS
5.1-channel systems.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is
digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression.
This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM
system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the
analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized
bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the
signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while
the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric
value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that
can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while
the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is
determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher
the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be
played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more
finely the sound level can be reproduced.
■ Sound field program information
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed
for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having
many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound
heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha
CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original DSP technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the
audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm
for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each
sound field program so that accurate representations of all the sound
field programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows
you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround
speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to
enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that
does not include a center speaker.
■ Video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated
into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the
chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this
system because each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with
component input jacks is required in order to output component
signals.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed
of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and
synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component
transmits these three elements combined.
Glossary
47 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ............................................... 100 W/ch
[Other models]
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ............................................... 100 W/ch
• Maximum Power (JEITA)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ................................................ 135 W/ch
[Asia, China, Korea and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ................................................. 135 W/ch
• MAX Power Per Channel
[U.K., Russia, and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................... 105 W or more
• IEC Power
[U.K., Russia, and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.1% THD, 6 Ω ........................................ 90 W or more
• Dynamic Power
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (Impedance Selector: 8 Ω)
(IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) .......................................... 110/130/160/180 W
[Other models]
(IHF, 6/4/2 Ω) .................................................... 105/130/150 W
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.41 dB
• Frequency Response
CD, etc. to Front ................................ 10 Hz to 100 kHz, 0/–3 dB
V-AUX to Front ................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, 0/–3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. (2ch stereo) to Front SP OUT,
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
1 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω ................................................... 0.06% or less
[Other models]
1 kHz, 50 W/6 Ω ................................................... 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD, etc. (STEREO) Input shorted
250 mV ............................................................... 100 dB or more
200 mV ................................................................. 98 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 170 µV or less
• Channel Separation
CD, etc. Input 5.1 kΩ shorted (1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control
BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 200 mV, 8 Ω) ....................................0.4 V/470 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
CD, etc. 1 kHz, 0.5%THD (EFFECT ON) ............. 2.0 V or more
• Output Level/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
(2ch Stereo and FRONT SP: SMALL) ..................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component .................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Video Maximum Input Level ................................ 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component Signal .................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] .........87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5%
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .............................................. 240 V AC, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ................................................... 220 V AC, 60 Hz
[China model] ................................................... 220 V AC, 50 Hz
[U.K., Russia, and Europe models] .................... 230 V AC, 50 Hz
[Asia and General models]
.............................................. 110-120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 240 W/320 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 240 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[Except Asia and General models] ...................................... 0.8 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models]
5ch, 10%/THD ................................................................ 530 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 151 x 318 mm
(17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 12-1/2”)
• Weight ............................................................. 8.0 kg (17 lbs 10 oz)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
48 En
■ Numerics
1 SOUND MENU .................................... 31, 32
2 INPUT MENU ...................................... 31, 34
2ch Stereo ...................................................... 25
3 OPTION MENU ................................... 31, 35
5ch Stereo ...................................................... 25
■ A
A)DISPLAY SET .......................................... 35
A)INPUT ASSIGN ........................................ 34
A)SPEAKER SET ......................................... 32
A.DELAY ...................................................... 34
A/B/C/D/E, front panel .................................... 3
Adjusting the speaker level ............................ 19
Adjusting the tonal quality ............................ 19
AM tuning ..................................................... 27
AMP, remote control ....................................... 5
ANTENNA terminals ...................................... 6
Audio cable plugs .......................................... 11
Audio delay ................................................... 34
AUDIO jacks ............................................. 6, 11
Audio jacks .................................................... 11
AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jacks,
front panel ................................................... 3
AUDIO SEL, remote control ........................... 5
AUDIO SELECT ........................................... 18
Audio select ................................................... 36
Audio settings ................................................ 34
Automatic preset tuning ................................ 27
Automatic tuning ........................................... 27
■ B
B)INPUT RENAME ..................................... 34
B)MEMORY GUARD .................................. 35
B)SP LEVEL ................................................. 33
BAND LEVEL TITLE, remote control ........... 5
BAND, front panel .......................................... 3
BASIC SETUP ........................................ 16, 31
Basic setup ..................................................... 31
BASS OUT .................................................... 32
BGV ............................................................... 35
Bluetooth setting ............................................ 36
Bluetooth status message ............................... 44
BT connected, Bluetooth status message ...... 44
■ C
C)AUDIO SELECT ....................................... 36
C)SP DISTANCE .......................................... 33
C)VOLUME TRIM ....................................... 35
Canceled, Bluetooth status message .............. 44
CD Listening ................................................. 22
CD Music Listening ...................................... 22
CENTER ........................................................ 32
Center graphic equalizer ................................ 33
Center speaker ............................................... 32
Center width .................................................. 26
CINEMA DSP indicator .................................. 4
Completed, Bluetooth status message ........... 44
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .................... 6, 11
Connect error, iPod controlling status
message ..................................................... 44
Connecting a DVD player ............................. 13
Connecting a TV ............................................ 12
Connecting audio components ...................... 13
Connecting speakers ........................................ 9
Connecting the AM antennas ........................ 15
Connecting the Bluetooth Wireless Audio
Receiver .................................................... 14
Connecting the FM antennas ......................... 15
Connecting the power cable .......................... 15
Connecting the Yamaha iPod
universal dock ........................................... 14
Connecting to CD player ............................... 13
Connecting to DVD recorder ......................... 13
Connecting to MD recorder/CD recorder ...... 13
Connecting to the CENTER terminals .......... 10
Connecting to the COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks .............................................11
Connecting to the FRONT A terminals .........10
Connecting to the FRONT B terminals ..........10
Connecting to the HDMI jacks ......................11
Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks ...........................................................14
Connecting to the SURROUND terminals ....10
Connecting video components .......................13
Control buttons, remote control .......................5
Creating original SCENE templates ..............23
CROSSOVER ................................................33
Crossover .......................................................33
CT WIDTH ....................................................26
Cursors/ENTER, remote control ......................5
■ D
D)CENTER GEQ ...........................................33
D)DECODER MODE ....................................35
D)PARAM. INI ..............................................36
Decoder indicator .............................................4
Decoder mode ................................................35
Decoder select mode ......................................35
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jack ...............11
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks ...............11
DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL assignment .....34
DIGITAL INPUT jacks ....................................6
DIMENSION .................................................26
Dimension ......................................................26
DIMMER .......................................................35
Dimmer ..........................................................35
Disc Listening ................................................22
Disconnected, Bluetooth status message .......44
Disconnected, iPod controlling status
message .....................................................44
Display settings ..............................................35
DISPLAY, remote control ...............................5
DOCK indicator, Front panel display ..............4
Dock Listening ...............................................22
DOCK terminal ................................................6
DSP LEVEL ...................................................26
DSP level ........................................................26
DTS decoder prioritize setting .......................35
DVD Live Viewing ........................................22
DVD Movie Viewing .....................................22
DVD Viewing ................................................22
DVR Viewing ................................................22
Dynamic range ...............................................34
■ E
E)BLUETOOTH ............................................36
E)LFE LEVEL ...............................................34
E)MULTI CH SET .........................................35
EDIT PRESET/TUNING, front panel .............3
Editing sound field parameters ......................26
ENHANCER indicator .....................................4
ENHANCER, remote control ..........................5
Enjoying 2-channel sources using
the standard decoders ................................26
Exchanging preset stations .............................28
■ F
F)D.RANGE ..................................................34
FM tuning .......................................................27
FRONT ...........................................................32
FRONT B .......................................................32
FRONT B speaker setting ..............................32
Front panel .......................................................3
Front panel display .......................................3, 4
Front speakers ................................................32
■ G
G)AUDIO SET ..............................................34
Game Playing .................................................23
■ H
Hall ................................................................ 25
HDMI ............................................................. 11
HDMI jack, HDMI cable plug ....................... 11
HDMI terminals ............................................... 6
Headphone dynamic range ............................ 34
Headphone LFE ............................................. 34
Headphones indicator ...................................... 4
HP D.R ........................................................... 34
HP LFE .......................................................... 34
■ I
Infrared window .............................................. 8
Infrared window, remote control ..................... 5
INI.VOL. ....................................................... 34
Initial volume ................................................. 34
Initializing ...................................................... 40
Input assignment ............................................ 34
Input channel and speaker indicators ............... 4
Input channel indicators ................................... 4
Input menu ..................................................... 31
Input rename .................................................. 34
Input selector buttons, remote control ............. 5
Input source indicators ..................................... 4
Input source information ............................... 20
INPUT, front panel .......................................... 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ......... 8
iPod connected, iPod controlling status
message ..................................................... 44
iPod control, Status message ......................... 44
■ J
Jazz ................................................................ 25
■ L
LFE indicator ................................................... 4
LFE/Bass out ................................................. 32
Listening to unprocessed input signals .......... 26
Low-frequency effect level ............................ 34
■ M
Manual preset tuning ..................................... 28
MANUAL SETUP ........................................ 31
Manual setup .................................................. 31
Manual tuning ................................................ 27
MAX VOL. .................................................... 34
Maximum volume .......................................... 34
MEM.GUARD .............................................. 35
Memory guard ............................................... 35
MEMORY, front panel .................................... 3
MENU, remote control .................................... 5
Movie Dramatic ............................................. 25
Movie Spacious ............................................. 25
MULTI CH IN, remote control ....................... 5
MULTI CH INPUT jacks ................................ 6
Multi channel input setup .............................. 35
Multi-channel sources and sound field
programs with headphones ....................... 26
Multi-information display ................................ 4
Music Disc Listening ..................................... 22
Music Enh. 2ch .............................................. 25
Music Enh. 5ch .............................................. 25
MUTE indicator ............................................... 4
MUTE TYP. .................................................. 34
Mute type ....................................................... 34
MUTE, remote control .................................... 5
Muting the audio output ................................ 19
■ N
NIGHT indicator .............................................. 4
Night listening mode ..................................... 19
NIGHT, front panel ......................................... 3
NIGHT, remote control ................................... 5
No BT adapter, Bluetooth status message ..... 44
Numeric buttons, remote control ..................... 5
Index
Index
49 En
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ O
Option menu ...................................................31
■ P
Pairing, Bluetooth control ..............................30
PANORAMA .................................................26
Panorama ........................................................26
Parameter initialization ..................................36
PCM indicator ..................................................4
PHONES jack, front panel ...............................3
Placing speakers ...............................................9
Playing video sources in the background .......20
Pop/Rock ........................................................25
PORTABLE (VIDEO AUX) jack,
front panel ...................................................3
Power cable ......................................................6
POWER, remote control ..................................5
PRESET .........................................................40
Preset SCENE templates ................................22
PRESET/TUNING, front panel .......................3
PROG, remote control ......................................5
PROGRAM, front panel ...................................3
■ R
Radio Listening ..............................................22
Rear panel .........................................................6
Remote control .................................................5
Resetting the system .......................................40
RETURN, remote control ................................5
■ S
SCENE ...........................................................21
SCENE 1/2/3/4, front panel .............................3
SCENE 1/2/3/4, remote control .......................5
Searching..., Bluetooth status message ..........44
Selecting audio input jacks .............................18
Selecting preset stations .................................28
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component as the input source ..................18
Selecting the night listening mode .................19
Selecting the SCENE templates .....................21
Set menu .........................................................31
Set this unit to the standby mode ...................15
Setting input source of the customized SCENE
template on the remote control ..................24
Setting remote control codes ..........................39
Setting the speaker impedance .......................40
SIGNAL INFO ...............................................20
Signal information ..........................................31
SILENT CINEMA .........................................26
SILENT CINEMA indicator ............................4
SLEEP indicator ...............................................4
Sleep timer .....................................................20
SLEEP, remote control .....................................5
Sound field programs .....................................25
Sound menu ....................................................31
SP A B indicators .............................................4
SP D.R ............................................................34
SP IMP. ..........................................................40
SP LFE ...........................................................34
Speaker distance .............................................33
Speaker distances ...........................................33
Speaker dynamic range ..................................34
Speaker impedance .........................................40
Speaker level ..................................................33
Speaker LFE ...................................................34
Speaker settings ..............................................32
SPEAKERS terminals ......................................6
SPEAKERS, front panel ..................................3
Specifications .................................................47
STANDBY, remote control .............................5
STANDBY/ON, front panel .............................3
START PAIRING ..........................................36
Start pairing ....................................................36
Straight decoding mode ..................................26
STRAIGHT, front panel ...................................3
STRAIGHT, remote control .............................5
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack .........................6
Subwoofer phase ............................................ 33
Supplied accessories ........................................ 2
SUR. LR ........................................................ 32
SUR.DECODE, remote control ....................... 5
Surround left/right speakers ........................... 32
SWFR PHASE ............................................... 33
■ T
TEST .............................................................. 34
Test tone ......................................................... 34
TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 3
Troubleshooting ............................................. 41
Tuner indicators ............................................... 4
TUNING AUTO/MAN’L, front panel ............3
Turning off the power .................................... 15
Turning on the power ..................................... 15
TV control buttons, remote control ................. 5
TV Sports ....................................................... 25
TV Sports Viewing ........................................ 22
TV Viewing ................................................... 22
TV/AV POWER, remote control ..................... 5
■ U
UNIT .............................................................. 33
Unit ................................................................ 33
Unknown iPod, iPod controlling status
message ..................................................... 44
Using the remote control ................................. 8
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks ........................ 15
Using your headphones .................................. 19
■ V
VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack, front panel ........ 3
Video cable plugs .......................................... 11
VIDEO jacks .............................................. 6, 11
Video jacks .................................................... 11
Virtual CINEMA DSP ................................... 26
VIRTUAL indicator ......................................... 4
VOLUME +/-, remote control ......................... 5
VOLUME control, front panel ........................ 3
VOLUME level indicator ................................ 4
Volume Trim ................................................. 35
■ Z
Zone B ........................................................... 18
“ASTANDBY/ON” or
“fDVD” (example) indicates the
name of the parts on the front panel
or the remote control. Refer to
“Functional overview” on page 3.
i
List of remote control codes
Blu-ray Player
Samsung 2137
CD Player
Yamaha 5000, 5013
CD Recorder
Yamaha 5001
DVD
Acoustic Solutions
2078
Aiwa 2055, 2100
Akai 2096
Akura 2076
Alba 2078, 2086
Apex 2027, 2049
Awa 2078
Axion 2078
Brainwave 2096
Brandt 2073, 2085
Broksonic 2060
Bush 2075, 2078, 2112
Centrex 2077
Classic 2078
Clatronic 2075
Coby 2078
C-Tech 2074
CyberHome 2025, 2079, 2091
Daewoo 2092, 2098
Dansai 2096
Daytek 2080, 2089
DEC 2075
Denon 2030, 2102, 2103
Denver 2075, 2076
Diamond 2074
DK Digital 2094
Dual 2078
D-Vision 2096
DVX 2074
Elta 2096
Euroline 2096
Funai 2052, 2058
Global Solutions2074
Global Sphere 2074
Goodmans 2075, 2077, 2078
Grundig 2077, 2098
H&B 2075
Haaz 2074
HE 2078
Hitachi 2032, 2072
Home Electronics
2078
Innovation 2072
Irradio 2134
JDB 2078
JVC 2033, 2045, 2053,
2073, 2099
Kenwood 2030, 2097
Kingavon 2075
Koda 2075
Lawson 2074
Lenco 2075
LG 2084, 2087
Lifetec 2072
Limit 2074
LogicLab 2074
Luxor 2077
Magnavox 2037, 2073, 2075
Magnum 2072
MBO 2078
Medion 2072
Micromaxx 2072
Micromedia 2073
Microstar 2072
Mitsubishi 2035
Mizuda 2075
Mustek 2078
Naiko 2077
Onkyo 2073, 2135
Orava 2075
P&B 2075
Pacific 2074
Panasonic 2030, 2040, 2054,
2057, 2105, 2110
Philips 2019, 2026, 2046,
2073, 2081, 2090
Pioneer 2036, 2082
Proline 2077
Provision 2075
RCA 2031, 2042, 2050,
2051
Red Star 2076
Reoc 2074
Roadstar 2075, 2078, 2086
Rowa 2077
Saba 2085
Sabaki 2074
Samsung 2032, 2041, 2104,
2113
Sansui 2074
Sanyo 2095
ScanMagic 2078
Scientific Labs 2074
Scott 2088
SEG 2074, 2086
Sharp 2034, 2043, 2059,
2093, 2106
Silva 2076
Singer 2074
Skymaster 2074, 2078
Skyworth 2076
SM Electronic 2074, 2078
Sony 2028, 2029, 2039,
2083, 2107
Soundmaster 2074
Soundmax 2074
Standard 2074
Star Cluster 2074
Starmedia 2075
Supervision 2074, 2078
Sylvania 2052, 2058
Synn 2074
TCM 2072
Teac 2074
Tec 2076
Technics 2030
Technika 2096
Technosonic 2096
Tevion 2072, 2074
Thomson 2085, 2109
Tokai 2076
Toshiba 2026, 2044, 2048,
2056, 2073, 2108,
2111
United 2078
Voxson 2078
Wharfedale 2074
Xlogic 2074
Yakumo 2077
Yamada 2077
Yamaha 2000, 2001, 2003,
2030, 2101
Yukai 2078
Zenith 2038, 2047, 2073
DVD Recorder
Apex 2024
JVC 2070
LG 2071
Panasonic 2020, 2065, 2066,
2067
Philips 2019, 2061, 2062,
2063
Pioneer 2021
RCA 2018
Sony 2022, 2064
Toshiba 2068
Yamaha 2023
Yukai 2069
DVD/LD
Pioneer 2036
DVD/VCR
JVC 1017, 2045
LG 1071, 2087
Panasonic 1020, 1072, 2040,
2105
Philips 1025
RCA 1022, 2042
Samsung 1021, 2041, 2104
Sharp 1023, 1073, 2043,
2106
Sony 1019, 1074, 2039,
2107
Toshiba 1024, 1075, 2044,
2108
Zenith 1026, 2047
DVD/DVR
Panasonic 2067
Pioneer 2114
Samsung 2115
Toshiba 2068
DVR
ABS 2132
Alienware 2132
CyberPower 2132
Dell 2132
DIRECTV 2123, 2128, 2129,
2133
DISH Network 2126, 2127
Dishpro 2126
Echostar 2126, 2127
Expressvu 2126
Gateway 2132
GOI 2126
Hewlett Packard 2132
Hitachi 2008
Howard Computers
2132
HTS 2126
Hughes 2123, 2128
Humax 2123
Hush 2132
iBUYPOWER 2132
JVC 2126, 2127
Linksys 2132
Media Center PC
2132
Microsoft 2132
Mind 2132
Niveus Media 2132
Northgate 2132
Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017,
2120
Philips 2117, 2121, 2123,
2128
Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014
Proscan 2129
RCA 2116, 2124, 2129,
2133
ReplayTV 2118, 2119, 2120
Sharp 2009, 2010
Sonic Blue 2119, 2120
Sony 2005, 2006, 2007,
2122, 2130, 2131,
2132
Stack 10 2132
Stack 9 2132
Systemax 2132
Tagar Systems 2132
Tivo 2116, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2130, 2131
Toshiba 2004, 2125, 2132
Touch 2132
UltimateTV 2133
Viewsonic 2132
Voodoo 2132
Yamaha 2011
ZT Group 2132
HD DVD
Toshiba 2136
iPod
Yamaha 5011
LD Player
Yamaha 2002
MD
Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004
Tape Deck
Yamaha 5005, 5006
Tuner
Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009,
5010, 5012, 5014,
5015, 5016, 5017,
5018
TV
Acer 0093
Acme 0207
Acura 0208
ADA 0255
ADC 0206
Admiral 0058, 0205, 0206,
0210, 0211
Adyson 0200, 0207
Agashi 0200
Agazi 0206
AGB 0204
Aiko 0127, 0200, 0207,
0208
Aiwa 0028, 0139, 0229,
0237
ii
APPENDIX
Akai 0059, 0065, 0127,
0129, 0130, 0200,
0204, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218,
0255
Akiba 0209, 0218
Akura 0206, 0209, 0218
Alaron 0200
Alba 0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0217, 0218
ALBIRAL 0212
Allstar 0213
Amplivision 0207
Amstrad 0204, 0206, 0208,
0209, 0218
Amtron 0062
Anam 0208
Anam National 0062
Anglo 0208
Anitech 0206, 0208
Ansonic 0203, 0208
AOC 0060, 0061
Apex 0118, 0122, 0132
Arc en Ciel 0216
Arcam 0200
Arcam Delta 0207
Aristona 0213, 0217
ASA 0205, 0211
Asberg 0213
Astra 0208
Asuka 0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
Atlantic 0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
Atori 0208
Audiosonic 0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0216, 0217,
0218
AudioTon 0207
Audiovox 0062
Autovox 0205, 0206, 0207
Awa 0200
Baird 0216
Bang & Olufsen 0205
Basic Line 0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
Bastide 0207
Baur 0217
Beko 0228
Belcor 0060
Bell & Howell 0058, 0064
Benq 0081
Beon 0213, 0217
Bestar 0213
Binatone 0207
Black Star 0214
Blaupunkt 0255
Blue Sky 0209, 0218
Bondstec 0214
Boots 0207
Bradford 0062
Brandt 0216, 0226
Brionvega 0205, 0213, 0217
Britannia 0200, 0207
Brockwood 0060
Broksonic 0138
Bruns 0205
BSR 0215
BTC 0209, 0218
Bush 0177, 0208, 0209,
0210, 0213, 0215,
0216, 0217, 0218,
0230, 0237
Candle 0060, 0061
Capsonic 0206
Cascade 0208
Cathay 0213, 0217
CCE 0127
Celebrity 0059
Centurion 0213, 0217
Century 0205
CGE 0214, 0215
Cimline 0208, 0218
Citizen 0060, 0061, 0062,
0064
City 0208
Clarivox 0212, 0217
Clatronic 0206, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0213, 0214,
0218
CMS 0200
Colortyme 0060, 0061
Concerto 0060, 0061
Concorde 0208
Condor 0200, 0207, 0213
Contec 0200, 0207, 0208
Contec/Cony 0062
Continental Edison
0216
Cosmel 0208
Craig 0062
Crosley 0205, 0214, 0215
Crown 0062, 0063, 0128,
0208, 0213, 0217
CS Electronics 0200, 0207, 0209,
0214, 0218
CTC 0214
Curtis Mathes 0057, 0060, 0061,
0064, 0065
CXC 0062
Cybertron 0209, 0218
Daewoo 0060, 0061, 0120,
0127, 0155, 0193,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0218, 0238
Dainichi 0200, 0209, 0218
Dansai 0200, 0206, 0213,
0217
Dantax 0217
Daytron 0060, 0061, 0208
De Graaf 0210
Decca 0204, 0207, 0213,
0217
Desmet 0213, 0217
Diamond 0200
Dimensia 0057
Dixi 0208, 0213, 0217
DTS 0208
Dual 0207, 0215, 0216
Dual-Tec 0207, 0208, 0215
Dumont 0060, 0127, 0205,
0207
Durabrand 0126
Dux 0217
Dynatron 0213, 0217
Elbe 0203, 0204, 0212,
0218
Elbe-Sharp 0204
Elcit 0204, 0205
ELECTRO TECH
0208
Electroband 0059
Electrohome 0059, 0060, 0061
Elin 0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
Elite 0209, 0213, 0218
Elman 0215
Elta 0200, 0208
Emerson 0060, 0061, 0062,
0064, 0128, 0205
Envision 0060, 0061
Erres 0213, 0217
ESA 0080
Etron 0208
Euro-Feel 0206
Euroline 0217
Euroman 0200
Euromann 0206, 0207, 0213
Europhon 0200, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0215
Fenner 0208
Ferguson 0212, 0217, 0226
Fidelity 0200, 0207, 0210
Finlandia 0210
Finlux 0204, 0205, 0207,
0213, 0215, 0217
Firstline 0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214
Fisher 0064, 0127, 0128,
0205, 0207, 0215
Flint 0213, 0218
Formenti 0200, 0205, 0207,
0215, 0217
Formenti-Phoenix
0200
Fortress 0205
Frontech 0206, 0208, 0210,
0211, 0214
Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025,
0088, 0127
Funai 0033, 0034, 0035,
0036, 0037, 0062,
0206
Futuretech 0062
Gateway 0094
GBC 0208, 0215, 0218
GE 0057, 0060, 0061,
0122, 0147
GEC 0204, 0207, 0211,
0213, 0217
Geloso 0208, 0210, 0215
General Technic 0208
Genexxa 0209, 0211, 0213,
0218
Gibralter 0060
GoldHand 0200
GoldStar 0060, 0061, 0127,
0128, 0200, 0201,
0207, 0208, 0210,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
Goodmans 0171, 0201, 0204,
0206, 0208, 0213,
0217, 0240
GPM 0209, 0218
Graetz 0211
Granada 0204, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217
Grandin 0208, 0209, 0217
Grundig 0128, 0130, 0222,
0236, 0255
Grunpy 0062
Halifax 0200, 0206, 0207
Hallmark 0060, 0061
Hampton 0200, 0207
Hanseatic 0203, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0215, 0217
Hantarex 0204, 0208
Harvard 0062
HCM 0206, 0207, 0208,
0218
Hifivox 0216
Higashi 0200
Hinari 0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
Hisawa 0209, 0218
Hitachi 0006, 0014, 0015,
0016, 0042, 0060,
0061, 0095, 0105,
0127, 0156, 0179,
0180, 0204, 0207,
0210, 0211, 0215,
0216, 0251
Hornyphon 0213
Hoshai 0209, 0218
Huanyu 0200, 0207
Hygashi 0200, 0207
Hyper 0200, 0207, 0208,
0214, 0215
Hypson 0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
ICE 0127, 0200, 0206,
0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
ICeS 0200, 0218
IMA 0062
Imperial 0211, 0213, 0214,
0215
Indiana 0213, 0217
Infinity 0063
Ingelen 0211
Ingersol 0208
Inno Hit 0201, 0204, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
Innovation 0206, 0208
Interbuy 0208, 0214
Interfunk 0205, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0216, 0217
International 0200
Intervision 0206, 0207, 0218
Irradio 0201, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218
Isukai 0209, 0218
ITC 0207, 0215
ITS 0200, 0209, 0213,
0218
ITT 0129, 0208, 0211
ITV 0208, 0217
JBL 0063
JC Penney 0057, 0060, 0061
JCB 0059
Jensen 0060, 0061
JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,
0108, 0136, 0153,
0178, 0190, 0213,
0218
Kaisui 0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0218
Kamosonic 0207
Kamp 0200, 0207
Kapsch 0211
Karcher 0207, 0208, 0212,
0217
Kawasho 0059, 0060, 0061,
0200
Kendo 0128, 0210
Kennedy 0215
Kenwood 0060, 0061
Kingsley 0200, 0207
Kloss Novabeam
0062
Kneissel 0203
Kolster 0213
Konka 0209, 0218
Korpel 0213, 0217
Korting 0205
Koyoda 0208
KTV 0062, 0127, 0207
Kyoto 0200, 0212
iii
Lenco 0208
Lenoir 0207, 0208
Lesa 0214
Leyco 0206, 0213, 0217
LG 0016, 0038, 0039,
0127, 0128, 0157,
0158, 0163, 0164,
0166, 0188, 0189,
0200, 0201, 0207,
0208, 0210, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
Liesenk 0217
Life 0206, 0208
Lifetec 0206, 0208, 0218
Loewe 0063, 0128, 0203,
0204, 0223, 0227
Loewe Opta 0205, 0213, 0217
Logik 0058
Luma 0210, 0217
Lumatron 0210, 0213, 0217
Lux May 0213
Luxman 0060, 0061
Luxor 0201, 0207, 0210
LXI 0057, 0061, 0063,
0064
Magnadyne 0204, 0205, 0214,
0215, 0217
Magnafon 0200, 0204, 0207
Magnavox 0060, 0061, 0063,
0102, 0103, 0150
Magnum 0206, 0208
Majestic 0058
Mandor 0206
Manesth 0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
Marantz 0060, 0061, 0063,
0090, 0213, 0217
Marelli 0205
Mark 0200, 0213, 0217
Matsui 0204, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0213, 0217
Mediator 0213, 0217
Medion 0206, 0208
Megatron 0061
Melectronic 0200, 0207, 0208,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217
Memorex 0058, 0061, 0064,
0208
Memphis 0208
Metz 0205
MGA 0060, 0061
Micromaxx 0206, 0208
Microstar 0206, 0208
Minerva 0204
Minoka 0213
Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016,
0048, 0060, 0061,
0104, 0112, 0113,
0125, 0205, 0213
Mivar 0200, 0201, 0202,
0203, 0204, 0207
Montgomery Ward
0058
MTC 0060, 0061, 0128,
0200
Multi System 0217
Multitech 0062, 0127, 0128,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0214, 0215,
0217
Murphy 0200, 0207
NAD 0061
Naonis 0210
NEC 0026, 0053, 0060,
0061, 0096, 0127
Neckermann 0205, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217, 0255
NEI 0213, 0217
Nesco 0214
NET-TV 0082, 0101
New Tech 0208, 0213
New World 0209, 0218
Nicamagic 0200, 0207
Nikkai 0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0213, 0217,
0218
Nikko 0061
Nobliko 0200, 0207
Nogamatic 0216
Nokia 0129, 0211
Nordmende 0205, 0211, 0213,
0216
Nordvision 0217
Oceanic 0211
Olevia 0084
ONCEAS 0207
Onwa 0062, 0218
Orbit 0213
Orion 0126, 0204, 0208,
0213, 0217, 0235
Orline 0218
Orsowe 0204
Osaki 0127, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
Osio 0201
Oso 0209, 0218
Osume 0218
Otto Versand 0204, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0255
Pael 0200, 0207
Palladium 0207
Panama 0200, 0206, 0207,
0208
Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0063,
0073, 0074, 0097,
0110, 0114, 0137,
0141, 0151, 0162,
0165, 0186, 0204,
0211, 0244, 0245,
0246, 0254
Pathe Cinema 0200, 0203, 0207,
0212, 0215
Pathe Marconi 0212, 0216
Pausa 0208
Perdio 0200
Philco 0060, 0061, 0063,
0128, 0205, 0214,
0215
Philharmonic 0207
Philips 0040, 0060, 0063,
0072, 0115, 0116,
0124, 0130, 0150,
0175, 0184, 0187,
0205, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0217, 0220,
0221, 0232, 0233,
0252, 0253
Philips Magnavox
0124
Phoenix 0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
Phonola 0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
Pilot 0060
Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0060,
0061, 0098, 0109,
0117, 0128, 0181,
0182, 0194, 0195,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217, 0250
Plantron 0206, 0213
Polaroid 0075
Poppy 0208
Portland 0060, 0061
Prandoni-Prince 0204, 0210
Precision 0207
Prima 0208, 0211
Profex 0208
Profi-Tronic 0213
Proline 0213
Proscan 0057
Prosonic 0200, 0207, 0217
Protech 0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
Proton 0060, 0061
Provision 0217
Pulsar 0060
Pye 0213, 0217
Pymi 0208
Quasar 0152, 0214
Quelle 0201, 0206, 0207,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
Radialva 0218
Radio Shack 0064
Radio Shack/Realistic
0057, 0060, 0061,
0062, 0064
Radiola 0213, 0217
Radiomarelli 0204, 0205, 0214
Radiotone 0213
RCA 0057, 0060, 0061,
0091, 0133, 0135,
0147, 0149
Realistic 0064
Revox 0213, 0217
Rex 0206, 0210, 0211
RFT 0203, 0205
Rhapsody 0200
R-Line 0213, 0217
Roadstar 0206, 0208, 0209,
0218, 0237
Robotron 0205
Rowa 0200
RTF 0205
Saba 0204, 0205, 0211,
0216
saccs 0212
Saisho 0204, 0206, 0207,
0208
Salora 0201, 0204, 0210,
0211, 0215
Sambers 0204
Sampo 0060, 0061, 0083,
0101
Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031,
0032, 0044, 0045,
0046, 0047, 0060,
0061, 0065, 0068,
0069, 0071, 0079,
0087, 0127, 0128,
0130, 0144, 0160,
0161, 0170, 0176,
0183, 0185, 0200,
0201, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0213, 0217,
0239, 0241, 0242,
0243
Sandra 0200, 0207
Sansui 0123, 0126, 0213
Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022,
0049, 0060, 0064,
0127, 0128, 0200,
0203, 0207, 0215
SBR 0217
SCHAUB LORENTZ
0211
Schneider 0207, 0209, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0218
Scotch 0061
Scott 0060, 0061, 0062
Sears 0057, 0060, 0061,
0064
SEG 0200, 0206, 0207,
0214, 0215, 0217
SEI 0204
SEI-Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0211
Seleco 0210, 0211, 0215
Sencora 0208
Sentra 0218
Serino 0200
Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011,
0060, 0061, 0066,
0070, 0087, 0111,
0143, 0145, 0167,
0168, 0169, 0198,
0204, 0224, 0247,
0248, 0249
Shogun 0060
Siarem 0204, 0205, 0215
Sicatel 0212
Siemens 0255
Sierra 0213
Signature 0058
Silva 0200
Singer 0205, 0214, 0215
Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0215,
0217
Skantic 0211
Solavox 0211
Sonoko 0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0217
Sonolor 0211
Sontec 0213, 0217
Sony 0041, 0059, 0067,
0085, 0086, 0174,
0196, 0199, 0208,
0219, 0234
Sound & Vision 0209, 0218
Soundesign 0060, 0061, 0062
Soundwave 0213, 0217
SSS 0060, 0062
Standard 0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
Starlight 0217
Starlite 0062
Stenway 0218
Stern 0210, 0211
Sunkai 0208, 0218
Sunwood 0208, 0213
Superla 0200, 0204, 0207
SuperTech 0200
Supra 0208
Supreme 0059
Susumu 0209
Sutron 0208
Sydney 0200, 0207
Sylvania 0060, 0061, 0063,
0080, 0134, 0142,
0148
Symphonic 0062, 0080
Sysline 0217
Sytong 0200
iv
APPENDIX
Tandy 0127, 0207, 0209,
0211, 0218
Tashiko 0200, 0207, 0210
Tatung 0127, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0217, 0237
TCM 0206, 0208
Teac 0127
Tec 0207, 0208, 0214,
0215
Techwood 0060, 0061
Teknika 0058, 0060, 0061,
0062
Teleavia 0216
Telecor 0218
Telefunken 0065, 0213, 0216
Telegazi 0218
Teletech 0208, 0214, 0217
Teleton 0207
Televideon 0200
Tensai 0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
Tesmet 0213
Tevion 0206, 0208
Texet 0200, 0207
Thomson 0191, 0192, 0207,
0213, 0216, 0226
Thorn 0212, 0217
TMK 0060, 0061
Tokai 0213
Tokyo 0200, 0207
Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053,
0054, 0064, 0078,
0089, 0090, 0106,
0107, 0127, 0131,
0140, 0146, 0159,
0197, 0225, 0231,
0237
Towada 0211, 0215
Transtec 0200
Trident 0204
Tristar 0218
Triumph 0204
Uher 0211, 0213
Ultravox 0200, 0205, 0207,
0214, 0215
United 0217
Universum 0127, 0128, 0129,
0201, 0206, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
Univox 0212
Vestel 0210, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
Vexa 0208, 0217
Victor 0213
VIDEOLOGIC 0200
Videologique 0200, 0207, 0209,
0218
Videosat 0214
VideoSystem 0213
Videotechnic 0200
Vidtech 0060, 0061
Viewsonic 0076, 0077, 0092,
0099, 0172, 0173
Visiola 0200, 0207
Vision 0213
Vortec 0213, 0217
Voxson 0205, 0210, 0211,
0213
Waltham 0207, 0212
Wards 0057, 0058, 0060,
0061, 0063
Watson 0213, 0217, 0218
Watt Radio 0200, 0207, 0212,
0215
Wega 0205
Weltblick 0213, 0217
Weston 0215
White Westinghouse
0200, 0207, 0217
Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0004, 0005,
0060, 0061
Yamishi 0218
Yoko 0200, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
Yorx 0209, 0218
Zanussi 0210
Zenith 0058, 0060, 0100,
0105, 0119, 0121,
0154
TV/DVD
Aiwa 0139, 2055
Apex 0132, 2049
Broksonic 0138, 2060
Bush 0230, 2112
JVC 0136, 2053
Panasonic 0137, 0254, 2054,
2110
RCA 0133, 0135, 2050,
2051
Sylvania 0134, 2052
Thomson 0226, 2109
Toshiba 0131, 0231, 2048,
2111
TV/DVD/VCR
Panasonic 0141, 1040, 2057
Samsung 0241, 1070, 2113
Sharp 0143, 1028, 2059
Sylvania 0142, 1041, 2058
Toshiba 0140, 1029, 2056
TV/VCR
Aiwa 0237, 1066
Bush 0237, 1066
Daewoo 0155, 0238, 1038,
1067
GE 0147, 1030
Goodmans 0240, 1069
Grundig 0236, 1062
Hitachi 0156, 1039
JVC 0153, 1036
Magnavox 0150, 1033
Orion 0235, 1065
Panasonic 0151, 1034
Philips 0150, 0232, 0233,
1033, 1062, 1063
Quasar 0152, 1035
RCA 0149, 1032
Roadstar 0237, 1066
Samsung 0144, 0239, 1027,
1068
Sharp 0145, 1028
Sony 0234, 1064
Sylvania 0148, 1031
Tatung 0237, 1066
Toshiba 0146, 0237, 1029,
1066
Zenith 0154, 1037
VCR
Admiral 1008, 1013
Adventura 1005
Aiwa 1005, 1042, 1043,
1044, 1066
Akai 1007, 1043
Akiba 1050
Akura 1043, 1050
Alba 1044, 1050
American High 1004
Amstrad 1042
Anitech 1050
ASA 1045, 1046
Asha 1002, 1014
Asuka 1042, 1045, 1046,
1050
Audio Dynamics1000
Audiovox 1003
Baird 1042, 1043, 1047
Basic Line 1044, 1050
Baur 1046
Beaumark 1002, 1014
Bell & Howell 1001
Blaupunkt 1046, 1048
Broksonic 1012, 1013
Bush 1044, 1050, 1066
Calix 1003
Candle 1002, 1003
Canon 1004
CCE 1006
CGE 1042, 1043
Cimline 1044, 1050
Citizen 1002, 1003
Colortyme 1000
Colt 1006
Craig 1002, 1003, 1006,
1014
Crown 1050
Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002, 1004,
1009
Cybernex 1002, 1014
Daewoo 1005, 1038, 1061,
1067
Dansai 1050
Dantax 1044
DBX 1000
De Graaf 1046, 1049
Decca 1042, 1043, 1046
Denon 1010
Dimensia 1009
Dual 1043, 1046
Dumont 1042, 1046, 1047,
1049
Dynatech 1005
Electrohome 1003
Electrophonic 1003
Elta 1050
Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005,
1012, 1013
Etzuko 1050
Ferguson 1043
Fidelity 1042
Finlandia 1046, 1047, 1049
Finlux 1042, 1043, 1046,
1047, 1049
FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049,
1050
Fisher 1001, 1047
Flint 1044
Formenti/Phoenix
1046
Fuji 1004
Fujitsu 1042
Funai 1005, 1042
Galaxy 1042
Garrard 1005
GBC 1050
GE 1002, 1004, 1009,
1014, 1030
GEC 1046
Geloso 1050
General Technic 1044, 1048
Go Video 1014
GoldHand 1050
Goldstar 1000, 1003, 1042,
1045
Goodmans 1042, 1045, 1050,
1069
Gradiente 1005
Graetz 1043, 1047
Granada 1046, 1047, 1049
Grandin 1042, 1045, 1050
Grundig 1046, 1050, 1062
Hanseatic 1045, 1046
Harley Davidson1005
Harman/Kardon 1000
Harwood 1006
HCM 1050
Headquarter 1001
Hinari 1044, 1050
Hisawa 1044
Hitachi 1007, 1010, 1039,
1042, 1043, 1046,
1049
Hughes Network Systems
1010
Hypson 1044, 1050
Imperial 1042
Inno Hit 1046, 1050
Innovation 1044, 1048
Instant Replay 1004
Interbuy 1045
Interfunk 1046, 1047
Intervision 1042
Irradio 1045, 1050
ITT 1043, 1047
ITV 1045
JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1006
JCL 1004
Jensen 1007
JVC 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1017, 1036,
1043
Kaisui 1050
Karcher 1046
Kendo 1044
Kenwood 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043
KLH 1006
Kodak 1003, 1004
Korpel 1050
Leyco 1050
LG 1003, 1042, 1045,
1071
Lifetec 1044, 1048
Lloyd’s 1005
Loewe 1048
Loewe Opta 1045, 1046
Logik 1006, 1050
Luxor 1047
LXI 1003
M Electronic 1042
Magnasonic 1047
Magnavox 1004, 1018, 1033
Magnin 1003, 1014
Manesth 1050
Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004,
1046, 1051
Marta 1003
Matsui 1044, 1045
Matsushita 1004
Mediator 1046
Medion 1044, 1048
MEI 1004
© 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved.
Printed in China WQ96000
The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual.
Les lettres dans les cercles et les numéros dans les carrés correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.
■ Front panel/Face avant
HTR-6230
UC
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
INPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
PORTABLE
VIDEO
AUX
VOLUME
EFFECT
SCENE
STANDBY
/ON
1
NIGHT
2
3
4
SPEAKERS
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
l
h
BAND
MEMORY
TUNING
AUTO/MAN'L
l
h
l
h
A
C D G H I
K OL N R
T PE F
J QSBM
00_Sheet_HTR-6230_UC.book Page 1 Friday, December 26, 2008 1:33 PM
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande
POWER
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
BAND LEVEL
TITLE
MENU
RETURN
ENTER
DISPLAY
VOLUME
AMP
DTV/CBL
DVR
TV CH
TV VOL
TV INPUT TV MUTE
POWER POWER
MUTE
STANDBY
TV
AB
AV
C
DE
SCENE
P
R
E
S
E
T
/
C
H
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
P
R
E
S
E
T
/
C
H
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1234
REC
PROG
ENHANCER
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
MULTI CH IN
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENT
2341
6
0
7
10
85
9
y
c
k
r
u
o
d
e
s
x
g
m
a
b
i
q
p
h
j
n
t
v
f
l
w
WQ96070
Printed in China
00_Sheet_HTR-6230_UC.book Page i Friday, December 26, 2008 1:33 PM
Transcripción de documentos
U HTR-6230 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. Caution-i En 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-ii En Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. Caution-iii En 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press ASTANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: ........................................ AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. 22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are incorrectly replaced. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by ASTANDBY/ON. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Contents INTRODUCTION ADVANCED OPERATION Set menu ................................................................ 31 Supplied accessories .................................................. 2 Using set menu......................................................... 32 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 32 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 34 3 OPTION MENU ................................................... 35 Functional overview................................................ 3 Front panel ................................................................. 3 Front panel display..................................................... 4 Remote control........................................................... 5 Rear panel .................................................................. 6 Quick start guide..................................................... 7 Remote control features ....................................... 37 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components .... 37 Setting remote control codes.................................... 39 INTRODUCTION Features.................................................................... 2 Advanced setup..................................................... 40 L Preparation of remote control ............................... 8 Connections ............................................................. 9 Basic setup .............................................................16 Troubleshooting.................................................... 41 Glossary ................................................................. 46 Specifications......................................................... 47 Index ...................................................................... 48 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) List of remote control codes...................................i BASIC OPERATION Playback.................................................................17 Selecting the SCENE templates ...........................21 Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 21 Creating your original SCENE templates................ 23 Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 24 Sound field programs ...........................................25 Selecting sound field programs................................ 25 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 27 • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “ASTANDBY/ON” or “fDVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the “Functional overview” on page 3. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Overview.................................................................. 27 FM/AM tuning operations ....................................... 27 Preset FM/AM stations ............................................ 27 About this manual ADVANCED OPERATION Basic procedure........................................................ 17 Additional operations............................................... 18 BASIC OPERATION Placing speakers......................................................... 9 Connecting speakers .................................................. 9 Connecting video components................................. 11 Connecting other components ................................. 13 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 15 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 15 Connecting the power cable..................................... 15 Turning on and off the power .................................. 15 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PREPARATION PREPARATION Using iPod™ ..........................................................29 Control and functions for iPod™............................. 29 Using Bluetooth™ components............................30 Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and your Bluetooth™ component ........................................................... 30 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 30 APPENDIX English 1 En INTRODUCTION Features Built-in 5-channel power amplifier ◆ Minimum RMS output power [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 100 W/ch Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W/ch [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) Front: 100 W/ch Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W/ch Various input/output connectors ◆ HDMI (IN x 2, OUT x 1), Component video (IN x 3, OUT x 1), Composite video (IN x 3, OUT x 2), Coaxial digital audio (IN x 1), Optical digital audio (IN x 2), Analog audio (IN x 9, OUT x 2) ◆ Speaker out (5-channel), Subwoofer out ◆ Discrete multi-channel input (6-channel) SCENE select function ◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations ◆ SCENE template customizing capability Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of surround field ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,487,535 and other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos and symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. iPod™ “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Decoders and DSP circuits ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Dolby Digital decoder Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder DTS decoder Virtual CINEMA DSP SILENT CINEMA™ We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Sophisticated FM/AM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) DOCK terminal ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) Other features ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter iPod controlling capability Sleep timer Cinema and music night listening modes Remote control with preset remote control codes Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion - and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following parts. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 En ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Remote control Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Functional overview Front panel C D E F G H I P VOLUME EDIT PRESET/TUNING l A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING h BAND MEMORY PREPARATION SPEAKERS TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 PHONES TONE CONTROL PROGRAM l STANDBY /ON 2 l EFFECT VIDEO B K L STANDBY/ON M C SPEAKERS D EDIT PRESET/TUNING E A/B/C/D/E Switches the tuning mode (see page 27). Selects the preset station group (A to E) (see page 28). PRESET/TUNING l / h Tunes into radio stations manually or automatically and selects a preset station group (see page 27). G BAND H MEMORY Q Q VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack PORTABLE R S Adjusts the volume level of this unit (see page 17). Connects to a game console or a video camera using a composite video cable (see page 15). R AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jacks Connects to a game console or a video camera using analog audio cables (see page 15). S PORTABLE (VIDEO AUX) jack T Front panel display Connects to an audio component (such as iPod) (see page 15). Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 17). Selects the reception band from FM and AM (see page 27). Stores a station that you tuned into as a preset station (see page 27). I ADDITIONAL INFORMATION F J VOLUME control Connect to a pair of headphones (see page 19). Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A or FRONT B speaker terminals (see page 18). O AUDIO ADVANCED OPERATION PHONES jack N P Turns on this unit, or sets it to standby mode (see page 15). B VIDEO AUX NIGHT h BASIC OPERATION A INPUT STRAIGHT h SILENT CINEMA A 4 3 INTRODUCTION T TUNING AUTO/MAN’L Selects a tuning method from automatic or manual tuning (see page 27). SCENE 1/2/3/4 APPENDIX J Recalls an input source and a sound field program assigned to each SCENE button (see page 21). K TONE CONTROL Selects “BASS” and “TREBLE” to adjust frequency response (see page 19). L PROGRAM l / h M STRAIGHT N INPUT l / h O NIGHT Selects a sound field program (see page 25). English Activates the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 26). Selects an input source (see page 17). Selects a night listening mode (see page 19). 3 En Functional overview Front panel display a b c d DVR t e V-AUX f DTV/CBL g MD/CD-R DVD DOCK VIRTUAL ENHANCER TUNER h CD AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY PRESET SLEEP MUTE SP SILENT CINEMA NIGHT AB q DIGITAL q PL ft q PL mS dB PCM j a k l m Decoder indicator Lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions. b c ENHANCER indicator SILENT CINEMA indicator DOCK indicator Input source indicators Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode (see page 27). h MUTE indicator i VOLUME level indicator j PCM indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 19). Indicates the current volume level. Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. k Headphones indicator l SP A B indicators Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 19). Lights up according to the set of front speakers selected (see page 17). m NIGHT indicator n CINEMA DSP indicator o Multi-information display Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 19). Lights up when you select a sound filed program (see page 26). Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. p Input channel and speaker indicators LFE LFE indicator • LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. • Input channel indicators Indicates the channel components of the current digital input signal. The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. g q VIRTUAL indicator Lights up or flashes according to the state of Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver connected to this unit (see pages 14 and 30). f p dB LFE L C R SL SR L C R SL SR Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 26). e q o VOLUME Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 25). Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 26). d n i SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 20). 4 En Input channel indicators Functional overview Remote control AMP i SCENE 1/2/3/4 Press this button before you control this unit (see page 17). c b POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER C MUTE d Recalls an input source and a sound field program assigned to each SCENE button (see page 21). j BAND LEVEL TITLE k MENU l Cursors (l / h / n / k) / ENTER Selects the speaker that you want to adjust (see page 19). e MD/CD-R TUNER CD INTRODUCTION h a Displays the set menu on the front panel display (see page 32). DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE f • Press cursors to navigate the set menu (see page 32). • Press ENTER to confirm a selection in the set menu (see page 32). g TV VOL m VOLUME +/– n RETURN Adjusts the volume level of this unit (see page 17). h Returns the previous menu level when the set menu is displayed (see page 32). SCENE i 1 2 3 4 MENU o VOLUME Displays the information of external components (such as a DVD player) (see page 38). PRESET/CH l A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E j ENTER n m P R E SE T / C H RETURN p q PROG l / h r ENHANCER Selects the sound field program (see page 25). Sets the sound field program to the “Music Enh. 2ch” or “Music Enh. 5ch” (see page 25). s SUR.DECODE t STRAIGHT u NIGHT v MULTI CH IN w AUDIO SEL r PROG 1 STRAIGHT 5 3 NIGHT 6 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 4 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT s u Selects a decoder from four decoders (see page 26). Activates the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 26). Selects a night listening mode (see page 19). x y w Sets the input source to MULTI CH IN (see page 18). Selects an audio input select setting for each input source (see page 18). x SLEEP y Numeric buttons ADDITIONAL INFORMATION v ENHANCER SUR.DECODE 2 ADVANCED OPERATION REC p t Control buttons Control external components (such as a DVD player) connected to this unit (see page 38). DISPLAY o q DISPLAY BASIC OPERATION k BAND LEVEL TITLE PREPARATION DVD TV CH Sets the sleep timer (see page 20). a Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals (see page 8). TV/AV POWER c STANDBY ( APPENDIX b Enter remote control codes or preset station number (see page 39). Turns your TV or other components on or off (see page 38). ) Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 15). d POWER ( ) Turns this unit on (see page 15). e MUTE f Input selector buttons g TV control buttons Mutes audio output (see page 19). English Switches the input source to each source (see page 17). Controls your TV (see page 37). 5 En Functional overview Rear panel a b c d e f ANTENNA OUT DOCK DTV/CBL DVR CENTER FRONT B HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO DVD SPEAKERS SURROUND DTV/CBL DVD MONITOR OUT AM PR GND DIGITAL INPUT VIDEO PB DVD DTV/CBL DVR IN OUT MONITOR OUT FM UNBAL. OPTICAL CD Y MULTI CH INPUT DTV/ CBL FRONT SURROUND CENTER DVD DTV/CBL AUDIO DVR IN CD OUT MD/ OUT IN (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUTPUT SUB WOOFR DVD COAXIAL FRONT A SUBWOOFER g a h i j DOCK terminal This input jacks support PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstream (see page 11). • COAXIAL (DVD) • OPTICAL (DTV/CBL) • OPTICAL (CD) Connect to the Yamaha iPod Universal Dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) using its dedicated cable (see page 14). b COMPONENT VIDEO jacks h HDMI terminals i VIDEO jacks Connect to video jacks on your video components with composite video cables (see page 11). • DVD input jack • DTV/CBL input jack • DVR IN jack • DVR OUT jack • MONITOR OUT jack e ANTENNA terminals Connect to the supplied FM and AM antennas (see page 15). f SPEAKERS terminals Connect to each speakers (see page 9). • FRONT A L/R • FRONT B L/R • SURROUND L/R • CENTER g DIGITAL INPUT jacks Connect to the DIGITAL output jacks on your digital audio components with Coaxial/Optical digital audio cables. 6 En AUDIO jacks Connect to the audio output/input jacks on your components with analog audio cables (see page 11). • DVD L/R jack • DTV/CBL L/R jack • DVR IN L/R jack • DVR OUT L/R jack • CD L/R jack • IN (PLAY) L/R jack • OUT (REC) L/R jack Connect to HDMI output/input terminals on your external components with HDMI cables (see page 11). • HDMI DVD terminal • HDMI DTV/CBL terminal • HDMI OUT output terminal d MULTI CH INPUT jacks Connect to the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder with analog audio cables (see page 14). • FRONT L/R jack • SURROUND L/R jack • CENTER jack • SUBWOOFER jack Connect to Y, PB/CB and PR/CR jacks on your video components with component video cables (see page 11). • DVD input jacks • DTV/CBL input jacks • DVR input jacks • MONITOR OUT output jacks c k j SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack Connect to a Subwoofer with an analog audio cable (see page 9). k Power cable Connect to a standard AC outlet (see page 15). Quick start guide The following steps describe the easiest way to operate this unit. See the related pages for details on the operation and settings. Step 3: Connect your components In these steps, you need the following items which are not included in the package of this unit. ❏ Speakers We recommend magnetically shielded speakers. ❏ Center speaker ................................... x 1 ❏ Surround speaker .............................. x 2 ❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1 Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. ❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video cable ............................................. x 2 Select an RCA composite video cable. Connect the power cable and turn on this unit. • Connecting the power cable • Turning on and off the power ☞P. 15 ☞P. 15 Step 5: Select the input source and start playback Select the component connected in the step 3 as an input source and start playback. • Basic procedure • Selecting the SCENE templates • Adjusting the sound field programs ☞P. 17 ☞P. 21 ☞P. 25 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1 Step 2: Set up your speakers Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. Video monitor Front left speaker Front right speaker ADVANCED OPERATION ❏ Video monitor ......................................... x 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. Step 4: Turn on the power BASIC OPERATION ❏ Speaker cable ......................................... x 5 ❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. • Connecting a TV monitor or projector ☞P. 12 • Connecting audio and video components ☞P. 13 • Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder ☞P. 14 • Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver ☞P. 14 • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞P. 15 • Connecting the FM and AM antennas ☞P. 15 PREPARATION ❏ Front speaker ..................................... x 2 At least two front speakers are required to start playback. Connect your TV, DVD player or other components. INTRODUCTION Step 1: Check the items Subwoofer Surround right speaker APPENDIX Center speaker DVD player Surround left speaker English • Placing speakers • Connecting speakers ☞P. 9 ☞P. 9 7 En PREPARATION Preparation of remote control Installing batteries in the remote control 1 3 Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 2 30º 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 a 30º Approximately 6 m (20 ft) Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. y Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control code. 8 En • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 39. Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 39. Connections Placing speakers Connecting speakers FL C FR SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SR ■ 5.1-channel speaker connection d g SPEAKERS ANTENNA D f e SURROUND R L DTV/CBL HDMI CENTER FRONT B L R ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. c ADVANCED OPERATION Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. AM GND VIDEO BL DVR IN MONITOR OUT OUT FM 75 UNBAL. BL DVR IN AUDIO OUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUTPUT SUB WOOFER R FRONT A h a L b APPENDIX Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. BASIC OPERATION Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Caution • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet. • Do not let the bare speakers wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit. See page 40 for details on setting “SP IMP.” PREPARATION SW 30˚ Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. INTRODUCTION The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. English 9 En Connections Speakers Jacks on this unit a Front speaker (A) Right* FRONT A (R) b Front speaker (A) Left* FRONT A (L) c Surround speaker Right SURROUND (R) d Surround speaker Left SURROUND (L) e Center speaker CENTER f Front speaker (B) Right* FRONT B (R) g Front speaker (B) Left* FRONT B (L) h Subwoofer SUBWOOFER * You can select the front speaker set from Front speakers (A) and Front speakers (B) by pressing CSPEAKERS repeatedly. See page 18 for details. ■ Connect speaker cables to each speaker ■ Connecting to the FRONT A terminals 2 1 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 1 Loosen the knob. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the slit on the terminal. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Connecting the banana plug (except Europe, Russia, Korea, and Asia models) The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. ■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS terminal A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the bare wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (3/8”) 10 En ■ Connecting to the FRONT B, CENTER, and SURROUND terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 Press down the tab. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the hole on the terminal. 3 Release the tab to secure the wire. Connections VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. Connecting video components Audio jacks and cable plugs AUDIO R L DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Input (Red) R L PR PR COMPONENT PB VIDEO Y (Orange) PREPARATION (White) Output (MONITOR OUT) PB Y O C VIDEO Coaxial digital audio cable plug Optical digital audio cable plug AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Video jacks and cable plugs You can play back pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source component to this unit using HDMI connections. At that time, audio/video signals output from the connected component (such as DVD player etc.) are output to the connected video monitor only when this unit is turned on and set to the input source (DVD or DTV/ CBL). Furthermore, available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component. ■ HDMI jack and cable plug ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS bitstreams. All digital input jacks are compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency. • This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jack. Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output from any speaker terminals but output from the connected video monitor. To enjoy the sound from speakers connected to this unit, – make an analog or digital connection besides the HDMI connection (see page 13). – mute the volume of the connected video monitor. ADVANCED OPERATION COAXIAL jack For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cable. Information on HDMI™ BASIC OPERATION Left and right analog audio cable plugs INTRODUCTION Information on jacks and cable plugs HDMI VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR HDMI cable plug (Green) (Blue) (Red) V Y PB PR • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. APPENDIX y (Yellow) Using the AUDIO OUT REC jack You can record the audio signal output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jack by using the recording components. Component video cable plugs Note • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. 11 En English Composite video cable plug Connections Connecting a TV monitor or projector Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Note • If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, the connection may fail. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. TV (or projector) Component video in Video in HDMI in Y PB Audio out PR V R L SPE ANTENNA OUT DOCK DVD DVD SURROUND R L DTV/CBL CE HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR DTV/CBL DVR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL DVR IN MONITOR OUT OUT FM 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL Y CD 3 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 SURROUND DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL DVR IN L AUDIO OUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUTPUT SUB WOOFER DVD 1 R R COAXIAL SUBWOOFER Recommended connections 12 En Alternative connections Connections Connecting other components This unit has three types of audio jacks, two types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection method depending on the component to be connected. ■ Connecting example (connecting a DVD player) DVD SU R DTV/CBL HDMI DOCK DVD PREPARATION ANTENNA OUT COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT OUT IN FM 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL Y CD 3 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 SURROUND DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL AUDIO DVR IN CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUT OUTPUT SUB WOOFER L BASIC OPERATION DVD 1 R R COAXIAL SUBWOOFER L R V Video out PR Audio out PB Component out Y ADVANCED OPERATION Coaxial out HDMI out C Recommended connections Alternative connections Component Video Audio Set-top box Video Jacks on this unit HDMI out* HDMI (DVD)* Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (DVD) Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVD) Optical out* COAXIAL (DVD)* Audio out (analog) AUDIO (DVD) HDMI out* HDMI (DTV/CBL)* Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (DTV/CBL) Video out (composite) VIDEO (DTV/CBL) Optical out* OPTICAL (DTV/CBL)* Analog out (analog) AUDIO (DTV/CBL) English Audio Jacks on component APPENDIX DVD player or Blu-ray Disc Signal type • You can also use the VIDEO AUX jacks (see page 15) on the front panel to connect an additional component. • To confirm the positions of “jacks on this unit” in the following table, refer to “Rear panel” in “Functional overview” on page 6. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Jacks used for audio and video connections Recommended connections are indicated by (*). When connecting a recording component, you need to make additional connections for recording (signal transmission from this unit to the recording component). y Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. INTRODUCTION Connecting audio and video components 13 En Connections Component Signal type DVD recorder Jacks on component Video CD player MD or CD recorder Jacks on this unit HDMI out* HDMI (DVR)* Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVR IN) Audio Audio out (analog)* AUDIO (IN (PLAY))* Audio recording Audio in (analog)* AUDIO (OUT (REC))* Video recording Video in (composite)* VIDEO (DVR OUT)* Audio Coaxial out* OPTICAL (CD)* Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (CD) Audio Audio out (analog)* AUDIO (IN (PLAY))* Audio recording Audio in (analog)* AUDIO (OUT (REC))* Notes • Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV if the video conversion is disabled. For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect other components to the VIDEO jacks. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default one assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, configure the “INPUT ASSIGN” setting (see page 34). • Only analog audio signals output at AUDIO OUT (REC) jack can be recorded using the recording components. Therefore Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks or analog signals input at MULTI CH INPUT jacks can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jack for recording. Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. CD 3 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 SURROUND DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL DVR IN L DVD 1 R R COAXIAL SUBWOOFER Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 34), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot be recorded. Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately). DOCK R Multi-format player or external decoder 14 En OPTICAL Center out Subwoofer out L Surround out R Front out L DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 DVD 1 Connections Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna Insert Close the lever INTRODUCTION Open the lever Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna PREPARATION Notes • The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. • The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks. Connecting the FM and AM antennas Note • The types of the supplied AM loop antenna is different depending on the models. Connecting the power cable Notes Outdoor AM antenna Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Power cable AM loop antenna (supplied) Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft) of vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. L ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ANTENNA To the AC wall outlet DEO N DVR OUT Indoor FM antenna (supplied) MONITOR OUT AM GND FM R SURRO 75 UNBAL. AUDIO DVR OUT OUTP CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) S Ground For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Turning on and off the power Turning on this unit Press ASTANDBY/ON (or dPOWER) to turn on this unit. y • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. APPENDIX N ADVANCED OPERATION • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. BASIC OPERATION Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Set this unit to the standby mode Note • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. 15 En English Press ASTANDBY/ON (or cSTANDBY) to turn off this unit. Basic setup The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. Choice Notes • Make sure that you disconnect your headphones from this unit. • If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see page 32). • Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 32). • Initial settings are indicated by (*) in the following each parameters. • Press nRETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level. 1 Press hAMP on the remote control. 2 Press kMENU. “BASIC SETUP” appears on the front panel display. 3 Press lENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP.” “ROOM: S M L” appears on the front panel display. 4 S 5 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft2 (4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2) M* 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft2 (6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2) L 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft2 (7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m2) When you have a subwoofer in your system. NONE When you do not have a subwoofer in your system. Press ln to select “SPEAKERS” and then ll / h to select the number of speakers connected to this unit. “SPEAKERS” and the current setting appear on the front panel display. 3spk 4spk 5spk* 7 8 Display L R • Check the speaker connections (see page 9) and adjust the “SPEAKERS” settings back in step 6, if necessary. • The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes on the front panel display. 9 Press ll / h to select the desired settings. Choice L C R L SL R SR L C R SL SR Function YES* Completes the setup procedure if the test tone levels from each speaker were satisfactory. NO Proceeds to the speaker level adjustment menu to balance the output level of each speaker. 10 Press lENTER to confirm your selection. • If you selected “YES” in step 9, the setup procedure is completed and then display returns to the top set menu display. Press kMENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP.” • If you selected “NO” in step 9, the front speaker level adjustment display appears on the front panel display. 11 Press lk / n to select a speaker and then ll / h to adjust the balance. The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn. • Press lh to increase the value. • Press ll to decrease the value. ■ The balance between speakers you can adjust in each item is defined as follows. Speakers Choice Adjusted balance between speakers Front L/R FR the front left and right speakers Front L/R Center C the front left and center speakers Front L/R, Surround L/R SL the front left and surround left speakers SR the surround left and surround right speakers SWFR the front left speaker and the subwoofer Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R Press ln to select “SET” and then ll / h to select the desired settings. “SET” and “CANCEL” appear on the front panel display. 16 En Press lENTER to confirm your selection. If you selected “SET” in step 7, each speaker outputs a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears on the front panel display for a few seconds and then “CHECK OK?” appears on the front panel display. y Condition YES* Choice Cancels the setup procedure without making any changes. • You can also press kMENU to cancel the setup procedure. Press ln to select “SUBWOOFER” and then ll / h to select the desired setting. “SUBWOOFER” and the current setting appear on the front panel display. 2spk CANCEL* Approximate Size of the room Choice 6 Applies the settings you made. y Press ll / h to select the desired setting. Select the size of the room where you have installed your speakers. The room sizes are defined as follows: Choice Function SET Note • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. 12 Press kMENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP.” BASIC OPERATION Playback 5 Rotate PVOLUME (or press mVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. PREPARATION Basic procedure 1 3 Turn on external components (TV, DVD player, etc.) connected to this unit. Press CSPEAKERS repeatedly to select the front speakers you want to use. The respective speaker indicators lights up on the front panel display. • See page 19 to adjust the level of each speaker. • This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. • You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume level (see page 34). 6 Press LPROGRAM l / h (or press hAMP and then qPROG l / h) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears on the front panel display. See page 21 for details about sound field programs. Movie Dramatic Available input source DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD Currently selected input source 4 Start playback on the selected component or select a broadcast station. Notes • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 27 for details about FM or AM tuning instructions. Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 18). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 26). • To display information about the currently selected input source on the front panel display, see page 20 for details. • To adjust the level of each speaker, see page 19. APPENDIX y Currently selected surround field program ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INPUT:DVD ADVANCED OPERATION Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (f)) to select the desired input source. The name of the currently selected input source appears on the front panel display for a few seconds. y BASIC OPERATION 2 INTRODUCTION Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. English 17 En Playback ■ Guide to contents When you want... See page Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 19 Edit parameters of sound field programs 26 Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at night 19 Use headphones 19 Select a decoder to play back sources with 26 Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 20 Using input setting features Use the following features to select input jack or input source. Selecting the front speaker set Press CSPEAKERS repeatedly change the active front speaker set that is connected to the FRONT A or FRONT B speaker terminals or turn off the front speakers. The active front speaker set changes as follows: FRONT A Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press hAMP and then press vMULTI CH IN) to select “MULTI CH.” “MULTI CH” appears on the front panel display. y Additional operations ■ Selecting the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 14) as the input source. FRONT B • You can configure the multi channel input settings in “MULTI CH” (see page 14). Notes • Sound field programs, or the night listening mode, etc. cannot be selected when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source. • When headphones are used, signals are output only from the front left and right channels. ■ Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input source when two or more jacks are assigned to an input source. y • We recommend that you set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 36). 1 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (f)) to select the desired input source. 2 Press hAMP and then wAUDIO SEL repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack select setting. DVR OFF V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD A.SEL:AUTO Note Audio input jack select setting • Turn off the volume level of this unit before you switch the front speaker setting. ■ Using the Zone B feature When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 32), you can use the speakers connected to FRONT B speaker terminals in another room (Zone B). Press CSPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers. When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in the main room are muted. Notes • You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers simultaneously. • If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP is activated automatically (see page 26). 18 En Choice Function AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. y • You can configure the audio input jack select setting in “AUDIO SELECT.” Note • This feature is not available if no digital input jack is assigned to the selected input source in “INPUT ASSIGN” (see page 34). Playback y Using audio features • Once you press jBAND LEVEL TITLE on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing lk / n. • The available speaker channels differ depending on the speaker settings. ■ 2 Muting the audio output Press eMUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press eMUTE again to resume the audio output. y ■ Adjusting the tonal quality Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front left and right speaker channels. Function BASS Adjusts the low-frequency response. TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response. ■ Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. y • When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode is automatically activated (see page 26). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. ■ Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. 1 Notes Choice ■ Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note • This operation will override the level adjustment made in “SP LEVEL” (see page 33). Choice Description Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR.L Surround left speaker SUR.R Surround right speaker NIGHT:CINEMA Narrows the dynamic range of film soundtracks and makes dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. NIGHT:MUSIC Preserves ease-of-listening for all sounds. NIGHT OFF Disables this feature. y • When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up on the front panel display. 2 Press ll / h to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed on the front panel display. Each choice is defined as follows. Choice Function MIN Slightly lowers the effect level. MID* Moderately lowers the effect level. MAX Considerably lowers the effect level. 19 En English FRONT L Function APPENDIX Press hAMP and then press jBAND LEVEL TITLE repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. Press ONIGHT (or press hAMP and then uNIGHT) repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC.” Each choice is defined as follows. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers. • This does not affect recorded material. 1 Using your headphones ADVANCED OPERATION Choice Use the following features to utilize various useful functions equipped on this unit. BASIC OPERATION Press KTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “BASS” or “TREBLE” and then press LPROGRAM l / h to adjust the corresponding frequency response level. Control range: –10 to +10 dB Each choice is defined as follows. Using optional features PREPARATION • You can also rotate PVOLUME (or press mVOLUME +/–) to resume the audio output. • You can configure the muting level by using “MUTE TYP.” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 34). • The MUTE indicator flashes on the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. Press ll / h on the remote control (or press FPRESET/TUNING l / h) to adjust the speaker output level. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB INTRODUCTION Use the following features to adjust the audio output or speaker level. Playback y • “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher than 48 kHz. • The effect of night listening modes may vary depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. ■ Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording from a source. Press hAMP and then press xSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. The sleep timer setting changes as follows. SLEEP 120min ■ Displaying the input source information (SIGNAL INFO) You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Press hAMP and then press kMENU on the remote control. “BASIC SETUP” appears on the front panel display. ;BASIC SETUP 2 Press lk / n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press lENTER. 3 Press lk / n to switch the displayed information. The following information about the input source appears on the front panel display. Choice 4 Description FORMAT Signal format. SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make discrete signals. CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. SLEEP OFF SLEEP 90min SLEEP 30min SLEEP 60min Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up on the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. To cancel the sleep timer Press xSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to select “SLEEP OFF.” y • If you set the main zone to the standby mode, the sleep timer is automatically canceled. ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons (f) on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. CD MD/CD-R TUNER Audio sources DVD DTV/CBL DVR Video sources V-AUX/DOCK DVD DTV/CBL DVR Video sources V-AUX/DOCK Press kMENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU.” MULTI CH IN 9 20 En Audio sources Selecting the SCENE templates This unit is equipped with 13 preset SCENE templates for various situations. The following SCENE templates are assigned to respective SCENE buttons in the default settings. SCENE 1 If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE buttons on the front panel and the remote control. Select the desired SCENE template The name of the SCENE template and its description 1 DVD Viewing – input source: DVD – sound field program: STRAIGHT For when you want to enjoy a DVD playback. SCENE 4 Radio Listening *2, *3, *4 – input source: TUNER – sound field program: Music Enh. 5ch For when you want to listen to a music program from the FM radio station. Press and hold the desired JSCENE (or iSCENE) button for 3 seconds. The MEMORY indicator on the front panel starts to flash, and the name of currently assigned SCENE template appears on the front panel display. DVD Viewing 2 Press NINPUT l / h (or press hAMP and then ll / h) to select the desired template. *1 You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in advance. See page 13 for details. *2 You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this unit in advance. See page 15 for details. *3 You have to tune into the desired radio station. See pages 27 to 28 for the tuning information. *4 To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna. 3 Press the JSCENE (or iSCENE) button again to confirm the selection. The MEMORY indicator stops flashing and the select SCENE template is assigned to the button. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DVD Movie View Notes ADVANCED OPERATION SCENE 3 TV Viewing *1 – input source: DTV/CBL – sound field program: STRAIGHT For when you want to watch a TV program. 1 BASIC OPERATION SCENE 2 Disc Listening – input source: DVD – sound field program: 5ch Stereo For when you want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player as the background music for this room. SCENE template library (Image) Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button PREPARATION Default SCENE button Selecting the desired SCENE template INTRODUCTION Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can recall your favorite input source and sound field program according to the SCENE template that has been assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are built combinations of input sources and sound field programs. y • To cancel the procedure, press hAMP and then nRETURN. Note APPENDIX • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 24 for details. English 21 En Selecting the SCENE templates Which SCENE template would you like to select? The following tables indicate preset SCENE template descriptions. Select the corresponding SCENE templates for the desired source. The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate that the SCENE templates in those cells are assigned to the SCENE buttons, respectively. You can also create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 23 for details. ■ Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video) SCENE template 1 ■ Input source Playback mode DVD Viewing DVD STRAIGHT Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents on your DVD player. DVD Movie Viewing DVD Movie Dramatic Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your DVD player. DVD Live Viewing DVD Pop/Rock DVR Viewing DVR Movie Dramatic 2 Playback mode Features Music Disc Listening DVD 2ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your DVD player. Disc Listening DVD 5ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources as the back ground music on your DVD player. CD Listening CD 5ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music source as the back ground music on your CD player. CD Music Listening CD 2ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your CD player. Input source Playback mode Features Music Enh. 5ch Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio programs. Playback mode Features Radio programs 4 Radio Listening TUNER iPod or Bluetooth component SCENE template Dock Listening ■ Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your digital video recorder. Input source SCENE template ■ Select this SCENE template when you enjoy music live video on your DVD player. Music discs (CD, SA-CD or DVD-Audio) SCENE template ■ Features Input source DOCK Music Enh. 5ch Input source Playback mode Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth component that is connected to the Bluetooth receiver. TV programs SCENE template 3 22 En Features TV Viewing DTV/CBL STRAIGHT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy TV programs. TV Sports Viewing DTV/CBL TV Sports Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on TV. Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Video games SCENE template Playback mode V-AUX Game Features Select this SCENE template when you play video games. Note • When an iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth receiver, this unit plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal. 2 You can create your original SCENE templates for each SCENE button. Refer to the preset 13 SCENE templates to create the original SCENE templates. Customizing the preset SCENE templates Create an original SCENE template Press the iSCENE button again to confirm the edit. SCENE : DVD Viewing SCENE : DVD Viewing INPUT : DVD 1 ADVANCED OPERATION 3 SCENE template library (Image) BASIC OPERATION • The input source component • The active sound field programs or STRAIGHT mode • The night listening mode setting (see page 19) – SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening mode. – CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the CINEMA mode. – MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the MUSIC mode. Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates. Select the desired SCENE template Press lk / n to select the desired parameter of the SCENE template and then ll / h to select the desired value of the selected parameter. You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE template: PREPARATION Creating your original SCENE templates INTRODUCTION Game Playing Input source 1 1 Press and hold the desired iSCENE button for 3 seconds and then press hAMP. The MEMORY indicator on the front panel starts to flash. 1 AMP y • An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE template. • To cancel the procedure, press hAMP and then nRETURN. Notes • After changing the assignment of the SCENE template to the iSCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 24 for details. • You can create a customized SCENE template for each iSCENE button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one. • The customized SCENE template is only available for the assigned iSCENE button. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button APPENDIX 3 seconds Note • When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned to any of the iSCENE button, press ll / h repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template (see page 21). English 23 En Selecting the SCENE templates Using remote control on the SCENE feature Controlling the input source components in the SCENE mode You can operate both this unit and the input source component by using the remote control. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 39). 1 Press the desired iSCENE button on the remote control. 2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below to control the input source component of the selected SCENE template. * POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B C MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 TV CH TV VOL SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 MENU 4 SCENE buttons VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY REC l PROG h 1 2 STRAIGHT 5 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 4 NIGHT 6 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT Note • These buttons control the input source component. See page 37 for details of the function of each button. Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE template, you must set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control to operate the input source component correctly. Press and hold the iSCENE button and the desired input selector button (f) for 3 seconds. y • Press the iSCENE button again to operate the input source component. 24 En Sound field programs Selecting sound field programs y • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. • You can select “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music Enh. 5ch” by pressing rENHANCER repeatedly. Sound field program descriptions PREPARATION Press LPROGRAM l / h (or press hAMP and then press qPROG l / h repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears on the front panel display. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 18). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 26). INTRODUCTION This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y Category MOVIE ENHANCER CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments. Hall CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful reverberation and a majestic atmosphere. Jazz CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music. It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation. Game CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games. The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies. TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium. Movie Spacious CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds. Movie Dramatic CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on threedimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center orientation of voices as pivots. 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 5ch Stereo CINEMA DSP processing. Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Music Enh. 2ch Music Enh. 5ch Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or 5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. APPENDIX STEREO Pop/Rock ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ENTERTAIN Features ADVANCED OPERATION MUSIC Program BASIC OPERATION • Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. • The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers. English 25 En Sound field programs ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. Press hAMP and then press sSUR. DECODE repeatedly to select a decoder. You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. STANDARD Function PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources ■ Editing sound field parameters Although you can enjoy good quality sound with the factory default parameters, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 1 While listening to a source, press hAMP and then press lk / n to select desired parameter. 2 Press ll / h to change the parameter value. Note • You cannot change parameter values when “MEM.GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 35). y • Initial settings are indicated by (*) in the following each parameter. For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports, Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic: DSP level DSP LEVEL Function: Adjusts the effect level. Choices: MIN, MID*, MAX For PRO LOGIC II Music: Panorama PANORAMA Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: OFF*, ON Dimension DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). 26 En Center width CT WIDTH Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For Music Enh. 2ch and Music Enh. 5ch Effect level Function: Adjusts the effect level. Choices: LOW, HIGH* ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP sound field programs without surround speakers. When you set “SUR. L/R” to “NONE” (see page 33), Virtual CINEMA DSP is activated automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 25). ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA is activated automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP sound field programs (see page 25). y • When it is activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up on the front panel display. ■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Press MSTRAIGHT (or press hAMP and then tSTRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT.” “STRAIGHT” appears on the front panel display. To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode Press MSTRAIGHT (or tSTRAIGHT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. FM/AM tuning 4 Overview ■ Frequency tuning mode You can search or specify the frequency of the desired FM/AM station automatically or manually (see “FM/AM tuning operations” on this page). Lights up AUTO TUNED A • To tune into a higher frequency, press FPRESET/TUNING h. • To tune into a lower frequency, press FPRESET/ TUNING l. Note • Orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna for the best reception. FM/AM tuning operations Note Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed on the front panel display. 3 To search the station automatically, press ITUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the front panel display. To search the station manually, press ITUNING AUTO/MAN’L again so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Use this feature to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of 5 preset station groups). Preset the desired stations to this unit by using the automatic or manual station preset. Automatic station preset You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals in order. Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed on the front panel display. 2 Press GBAND to select “FM” as the reception band. 3 Press and hold HMEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting status from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. Lights up during automatic tuning AUTO A AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears on the front panel display, automatic/manual tuning is not possible. Press DEDIT PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. Flashes AUTO APPENDIX 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press GBAND to select the reception band (FM or AM). Preset FM/AM stations ADVANCED OPERATION 2 • If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. BASIC OPERATION 1 AM 1530 kHz PREPARATION ■ Preset tuning mode You can preset the desired FM/AM station in advance, and then recall the station by specifying the preset group and number (see “Selecting preset stations” on page 28). INTRODUCTION You can use two tuning modes to tune into a desired FM/ AM station: To begin automatic tuning, press FPRESET/TUNING l / h once. To tune into the desired station manually, press FPRESET/TUNING l / h repeatedly. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz 27 En English Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. FM/AM tuning y • You can select the preset station group and the preset station number where the first received station will be stored by pressing EA/B/C/D/E and then FPRESET/TUNING l / h. 1 Press EA/B/C/D/E (or ll / h) repeatedly to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. 2 Press FPRESET/TUNING l / h (or lk / n) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number, along with station band and frequency, appear on the front panel display. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune it manually and store it as described in “Manual station preset” on this page. Manual station preset Use this feature to store the FM or AM stations manually. 1 Tune into a station. See page 27 for using instructions. 2 Press HMEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes on the front panel display for approximately 30 seconds. 3 Press EA/B/C/D/E and FPRESET/TUNING l / h repeatedly to select a preset station group and number (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Check that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. • To select a higher preset station group and number, press FPRESET/TUNING h. • To select a lower preset station group and number, press FPRESET/TUNING l. Flashes TUNED C3 : AM E1 : FM 87.5 MHz y • You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly by pressing the numeric buttons (y). Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations between the two. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” and “A5.” 1 Select preset station “E1” using EA/B/C/D/E and FPRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. 2 Press and hold DEDIT PRESET/TUNING for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash on the front panel display. MEMORY 630 kHz Flashes Preset station group and number MEMORY 4 Press HMEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear on the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. E1 : FM 87.5 MHz Flashes 3 TUNED C3 : AM 630 kHz Select preset station “A5” using EA/B/C/D/E and FPRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash on the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. The displayed station has been stored as C3. Flashes MEMORY Selecting preset stations A5 : FM 90.5 MHz You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it is stored. When performing this operation with the remote control, press fTUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 28 En Flashes 4 Press DEDIT PRESET/TUNING again. “EXCHANGE E1-A5” appears on the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 14), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. ■ Stationing your iPod to the Yamaha iPod universal dock Once you station your iPod to the Yamaha iPod universal dock, “iPod connected” and the DOCK indicator appears on the front panel display when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. Control and functions for iPod™ BASIC OPERATION V-AUX/DOCK POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MUTE A B C CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVR D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 TV CH BAND LEVEL TITLE MENU TV VOL SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 MENU 4 VOLUME ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY REC RETURN l PROG h 1 2 STRAIGHT 5 3 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 0 Playback control buttons Navigates the menu of your iPod. p/e: Play/pause s: Stop w / f: Search backward/forward b / a: Skip backward/forward DISPLAY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 4 NIGHT 6 MENU/Cursor buttons (k / n / l / h) / ENTER Navigates the menu of your iPod. • Press kMENU or ll to move to the previous menu level. • Press lk / n to move to the upper/lower menu level. • Press lENTER or lh to move to the subsequent menu, start playback of the selected menu level, or change the selected setting. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DTV/CBL V-AUX/DOCK Selects “V-AUX” or “DOCK” as the input source. ADVANCED OPERATION DVD V-AUX/DOCK 10 8 SLEEP ENT REC PREPARATION ■ Battery charge feature Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. INTRODUCTION ■ Supported iPod iPod (Click Wheel, including iPod classic) iPod nano iPod mini iPod touch Notes APPENDIX • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. Refer to the instruction manuals of your iPod for the operations on your iPod. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. • For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 44. English 29 En Using Bluetooth™ components You can connect a Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” for the connected Bluetooth receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance. Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and your Bluetooth™ component Pairing must be performed when you use a Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications. y • You need to perform the pairing operation only when you use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth receiver for the first time. • You need to perform the pairing operations both on this unit and on the Bluetooth component. If necessary, refer to operating instructions of the Bluetooth component. 5 Select the Bluetooth receiver in the Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass key “0000” to the Bluetooth component. When the pairing is completed successfully, “Completed” appears on the front panel display. Note • The Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver can be paired with up to eight other components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared. Playback of the Bluetooth™ component There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing. 1 ■ Pairing by using “SET MENU” Use this feature to perform pairing of this unit and the video monitor. Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU.” See page 36 for details. Press hAMP and then press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press fV-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the input source. 2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component. When the connected Bluetooth receiver detects the Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the DOCK indicator appears on the front panel display. ■ Quick pairing To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. 1 Press hAMP and then press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press fV-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the input source. 2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with. 3 Press and hold GBAND (or jBAND LEVEL TITLE) for 3 seconds. Once the Bluetooth receiver starts pairing, “Searching...” appears for a moment. While the Bluetooth receiver is in the pairing mode, DOCK indicator flashes on the front panel display. y • To cancel the pairing, press GBAND (or jBAND LEVEL TITLE) again. Note • If the Bluetooth receiver is not connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears on the front panel display. 4 Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth receiver. If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list. 30 En y • When you press lENTER on the remote control, the connected Bluetooth receiver searches and connect to the last connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth receiver cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears on the front panel display. • To disconnect the Bluetooth receiver from the Bluetooth component, press nRETURN. ADVANCED OPERATION Set menu Basic setup BASIC SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 16). Manual setup MANUAL SETUP ■ Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page 32 B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 33 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the distance of each speaker. 33 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 33 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 34 F)D.RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 34 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay settings, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 34 ■ Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page Assigns the input jacks on this unit according to the component to be used. 34 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 34 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 35 D)DECODER MODE Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 35 E)MULTI CH SET Select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 35 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A)INPUT ASSIGN ADVANCED OPERATION Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. BASIC OPERATION A)SPEAKER SET PREPARATION Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. INTRODUCTION You can use the following parameters in the set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display. 35 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other set menu settings. 35 C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. 36 D)PARAM. INI Sets all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. 36 E)BLUETOOTH Pairs the connected Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a Bluetooth component (see page 30). 36 English Signal information APPENDIX A)DISPLAY SET SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 20). 31 En Set menu Using set menu Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. 1 SOUND MENU y Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. • You can change the set menu parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • Initial settings are indicated by (*) in this following each parameter. 1 2 Press hAMP and then press kMENU on the remote control. “BASIC SETUP” appears on the front panel display. Press lk / n to select “MANUAL SETUP.” . MANUAL SETUP 3 Press lENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP.” “1 SOUND MENU” appears on the front panel display. y Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. ■ FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. Choice Condition FRONT* When FRONT B speakers are set in the main zone. ZONE B When FRONT B speakers are set in another zone. This setting mutes all the speakers in the main room when FRONT B is selected by CSPEAKERS. 1 SOUND MENU Notes 4 Press lk / n repeatedly and then press lENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following menus appear on the front panel display as you press lk / n repeatedly. 1 SOUND MENU 2 INPUT MENU 3 OPTION MENU 5 Press lk / n repeatedly and then press lENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. • Repeat this step to navigate to and enter the items you want to adjust. • To return to the previous menu level, press nRETURN. 6 Press lk / n to select the desired parameter and then ll / h to change the parameter value. • Press lh to increase the value. • Press ll to decrease the value. 7 Press kMENU to exit from set menu. • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B terminals while “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B.” • If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B,” this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 26). Woofer diameter of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large Woofer diameter of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small ■ Front speakers, Center speaker, Surround left/right speakers FRONT, CENTER, SUR. LR Select “LARGE (LRG)” or “SMALL (SML)” depending on the size of your each speaker. When Center speaker or Surround speakers is not connected, select “NONE.” Initial setting: FRONT: “LARGE” CENTER: “SML” SUR. LR: “SML” Notes • When “BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 32), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT.” If “FRONT” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE.” • When you select “NONE” in “CENTER,” the center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. • When you select “NONE” in “SUR. LR,” this unit is automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 26). ■ LFE/Bass out BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. y • If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. 32 En Set menu LFE signals output Choice Notes Front speakers Other speakers BOTH* Output No output No output SWFR Output No output No output No output Output No output FRONT Low-frequency signals output Choice Front speakers Other speakers *1 *2 *3 SWFR *4 *3 *3 FRONT No output *1 *3 Notes ■ Crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 31 and 32). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz*, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz Choice Function NRM* Does not reverse the phase of your subwoofer. REV Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse. Speaker level B)SP LEVEL SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker Front left speaker FR Front right speaker C Center speaker SL Surround left speaker SR Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer UNIT Choice Condition meters When you adjust speaker distances in meters. feet* When you adjust speaker distances in feet. ■ Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft) SUR. L/SUR. R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer Note • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. Control range: –6.0 to 0* to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB y • Press lk / n to select a frequency band and ll / h to adjust the selected frequency band. • You can make adjustment while listening to the currently source or a test tone. Following is an example where “100Hz” is selected as the frequency band. 100Hz--||-- English FL Unit APPENDIX Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Control range: –10 to 0* to +10 dB Control step: 1 dB ■ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. All sounds would be adjusted to arrive at the listening position at the same time regardless of distance from each speaker. ADVANCED OPERATION Note • All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 31 and 32). C)SP DISTANCE BASIC OPERATION *1 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the front channels and other speakers to “SML” or “NONE.” *2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front channels. *3 Output the low-frequency signals if the sizes of speakers are set to “LARGE” (or “LRG”). *4 Output the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to “SML.” Speaker distance PREPARATION Subwoofer BOTH* • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • This does not affect recorded material. INTRODUCTION Subwoofer 0 33 En Set menu ■ Test tone TEST Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. Choice Function OFF* Stops test tones and output the currently. ON Outputs test tones from the center and from left speakers. Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. Control range: –20 to 0* dB Control step: 1 dB ■ Speaker LFE SP LFE Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Notes • Depending on the settings of “BASS OUT” (see page 32), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. • The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. • This setting is effective when the input signal contains the LFE channel. F)D.RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choice Function MIN Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow. STD Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. MAX* Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range. ■ Speaker dynamic range SP D.R Adjusts the speaker compression. ■ Headphone dynamic range Adjusts the headphone compression. Audio settings HP D.R G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. ■ Mute type MUTE TYP. Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 19). Choice Function FULL* Completely mutes all the audio output. -20dB Reduces the current volume by 20 dB. 34 En ■ Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level regardless of the original volume range. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound. Control range: +16 dB*, +10 dB to –30 dB Control step: 5 dB Note • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume” setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ■ Initial volume INI.VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off*, –80 dB to +16 dB Control step: 1 dB ■ Headphone LFE HP LFE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Dynamic range ■ Audio delay A.DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary for certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0* to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Note • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.” setting. 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. y • Initial settings are indicated by (*) in this following each parameter. Input assignment A)INPUT ASSIGN Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR Initial setting: IN (1) (COAXIAL jack): DVD IN (2) (OPTICAL (DTV/CBL) jack): DTV/CBL IN (3) (OPTICAL (CD) jack): CD Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once. • You cannot assign the same input source to both “IN (2)” and “IN (3).” For example, you assign “CD” to “IN (2),” “–––” appears in “IN (3).” • Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using NINPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons (f) on the remote control). Input rename B)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears on the front panel display. Set menu The following is an example where “DVD” is renamed “My DVD.” DVR DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD My DVD DTS decoder prioritize setting Choice Function AUTO* Automatically detect the type of input signals and selects the appropriate input mode. DTS Enables to playback a DTS-CD. Press one of the input selector buttons (f) or vMULTI CH IN to select the input source you want to change the name of. 2 Press hAMP and then press ll / h on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. 3 Press lk / n to select the character you want to use and then press ll / h to move to the next space. • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. Notes Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press ln to change the character in the following order, or press lk to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) y Multi channel input setup E)MULTI CH SET ■ BGV BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: LAST*, DVR, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, DVD y 5 Press kMENU to exit from “INPUT RENAME.” Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM Press one of the input selector buttons (f) or vMULTI CH IN to select the input source you want to adjust the level. Choices: CD, TUNER, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX (DOCK), DVR, MULTI CH IN Control range: –6.0 to 0.0* to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB D)DECODER MODE ■ Decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. Choice A)DISPLAY SET ■ Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0* Control step: 1 • Press ll to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press lh to make the front panel display brighter. Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD ■ Memory guard MEM.GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choice Function OFF* Turns off the “MEM.GUARD” feature. ON Protects: – sound field program parameters – all set menu items – SCENE template parameters Note • When “MEM.GUARD” is set to “ON,” you cannot select and adjust any other set menu items. APPENDIX Decoder mode Display settings ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. • Initial settings are indicated by (*) in this following each parameter. ADVANCED OPERATION Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 3 OPTION MENU BASIC OPERATION 4 PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION DVD V-AUX ■ Function Automatically detect the type of input signals and selects the appropriate decoder mode. LAST Automatically select the last decoder mode used the connected input source. English AUTO* 35 En Set menu Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources. Choice Function AUTO* Automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Automatically select the last input mode used for the connected input source (see page 18). Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. Choice Function NO* Cancels the parameter initialization and returns to the previous menu level. YES Sets all the sound field parameters to the initial factory settings. Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. Bluetooth setting E)BLUETOOTH ■ Start pairing START PAIRING Use this feature to start pairing the connected Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing, refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and your Bluetooth™ component” on page 30. To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. 1 Select “START PAIRING” in “BLUETOOTH” and then press lENTER to start pairing. The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears on the front panel display. 2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth receiver. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Bluetooth component. 3 Select the Bluetooth receiver in the Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass key “0000” on the Bluetooth component. Once this unit completes the pairing successfully, “Completed” appears. y • To cancel the pairing, press nRETURN to exit from “START PAIRING.” 36 En 4 Press nRETURN to exit from “START PAIRING.” Notes • If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any Bluetooth components, “Not found” appears. • If a Bluetooth receiver is not connected to this unit, “No BT adapter” appears. Remote control features - Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit Press hAMP to control this unit. POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B C MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D TV CH TV INPUT TV MUTE DTV/CBL SCENE 1 2 STANDBY POWER AV A B C MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER TV VOL AMP BAND LEVEL TITLE POWER TV E *1 AMP POWER PREPARATION POWER ■ Controlling a TV Press fDTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your TV, set the appropriate remote control code for fDTV/ CBL (see page 39). 3 MENU DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE TV CH INTRODUCTION In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 39). *1 4 TV VOL VOLUME SCENE 1 ENTER 2 RETURN *2 MENU ENTER RETURN l PROG h 1 2 STRAIGHT 5 4 VOLUME DISPLAY REC 3 REC 4 *2 NIGHT 6 0 DISPLAY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 3 BASIC OPERATION BAND LEVEL TITLE 10 8 SLEEP ENT *2 l PROG h 1 2 STRAIGHT 5 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 4 NIGHT 6 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT ADVANCED OPERATION Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit. *2 These buttons control this unit only when hAMP is pressed. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether you press fDTV/CBL or not. Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV INPUT Changes the input source. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. y • You can control more than one TV by setting the appropriate remote control code for any input source selector buttons other than fDTV/ CBL. In such a case, you can control the buttons highlighted above (*1 and *2) when you press the input source selector button. APPENDIX *2 These buttons control your TV only when fDTV/CBL is pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on page 38. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Remote control English 37 En Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Press one of the input selector buttons (f) or A to E buttons to control other components. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 39). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. [1] [2] POWER POWER TV AV A STANDBY POWER B C MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR VCR Power *1 Digital TV/ Cable TV Power *2 VOLUME [7] ENTER [4] RETURN [8] DISPLAY [5] V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 • The remote control has 13 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 13 different components. • When you press one of the optional component control area buttons (A to E), you can control the desired component without changing the input source of this unit. DVD player/ recorder [3] MENU REC y Remote control TV CH BAND LEVEL TITLE TV VOL l PROG h 1 SCENE 3 4 5 Power *1 CD player Power *1 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 4 NIGHT 6 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 LD player 2 STRAIGHT [6] 0 MD/CD recorder 10 8 SLEEP ENT [9] Tuner [1] AV POWER Power *1 [2] TITLE Title Power *1 [3] PRESET/CH k Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) PRESET/CH n Down VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) A/B/C/D/E l Left Left Preset down (A-E) A/B/C/D/E h Right Right Preset up (A-E) ENTER Enter Enter [4] RETURN Return [5] REC Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play w Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward f Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop [6] 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons [7] MENU Menu [8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display [9] ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index Band Return Rec Rec *2 Disc skip Rec Menu Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. *2 These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 39). 38 En Preset stations (1-8) Remote control features 2 Setting remote control codes Remote control code default settings Input source Component category Manufacturer Notes Default code 5013 5001 TUNER TUNER Yamaha 5007 DVD DVD Yamaha 2000 DTV/CBL — — — V-AUX/ DOCK TUNER Yamaha 5011 DVR DVR Yamaha 2011 A TUNER Yamaha 5012 B TUNER Yamaha 5009 C TUNER Yamaha 5017 D — — — E — — — ■ Resetting all remote control codes Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory settings. 1 While pressing and holding hAMP, press bAV POWER for more than 3 seconds. AMP Note • You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code. 1 A B C CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AV While holding down 2 Press for 3 seconds Press the numeric buttons (y) to enter the code number “9981.” “RemoteSetup OK” appears on the front panel display, and the remote control codes previously set are cleared and reset to the initial factory settings. y • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 1, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing procedure. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION While pressing and holding one of the input selector buttons (f) on the remote control to select the input area you want to set up, press bAV POWER for more than 3 seconds. POWER ADVANCED OPERATION Yamaha Yamaha BASIC OPERATION CD CD-R PREPARATION CD MD/CD-R • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. INTRODUCTION You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (y) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component to be used. When the setting succeeds, “RemoteSetup OK” appears; however, when it dues not, “RemoteSetup NG” appears on the front panel display. POWER AV APPENDIX Press for 3 seconds While holding down English 39 En Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed on the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated by (*) in this following parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • Only ASTANDBY/ON, LPROGRAM l / h and MSTRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available on the front panel display. 1 Press ASTANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold KTONE CONTROL and then press ASTANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears on the front panel display. 3 Press LPROGRAM l / h to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears on the front panel display. 4 Press MSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. 5 Press ASTANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. y ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Caution If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8ΩMIN*, 6ΩMIN • Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Front (A or B) 8ΩMIN Center Impedance level The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround Front (A or B) 6ΩMIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround ■ Initializing PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Choices: CANCEL*, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. • The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the set menu parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. 40 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting ■ General Problem The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 40 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 9 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11-13 No appropriate Audio input jack select has been set. Set an appropriate Audio input jack select. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with N INPUT l / h on the front panel (or the input selector buttons (f) on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 9 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with CSPEAKERS. 18 36 17, 18 19 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output from any speaker terminals. Make an analog or digital connection beside the HDMI connection. — The setting of the connected component is improper. Make an appropriate setting following the instruction manual of the connected component. — The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the impedance setting is correct. 40 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press eMUTE or mVOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 19 41 En English — Press eMUTE or mVOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. APPENDIX Turn up the volume. The sound is muted. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The volume is turned down. ADVANCED OPERATION The sound suddenly goes off. See page BASIC OPERATION No sound Remedy PREPARATION This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. Cause INTRODUCTION Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL.” Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. 33 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE.” Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG.” 32 Some sound field programs do not output sounds from the center speaker. Try another sound field program. 25 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. “SUR. LR” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE.” Set “SUR. LR” to “SML” or “LRG.” 32 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press M STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 26 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. “BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH.” 32 “BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel source is being played. Set “BASS OUT” to “BOTH.” 32 11-14 The source does not contain lowfrequency bass signals. Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG.” Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO.” 18 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. You are attempting to set the volume level higher than the maximum volume level. Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting. 34 The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jack on this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jack. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 13 42 En Troubleshooting This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 9 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature is too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — Virtual CINEMA DSP is not activated. “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source. Select an input source other than “MULTI CH.” 17 Headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Disconnect the headphone plug from the PHONES jack. — This unit is in the “5ch Stereo” mode. Exit from the “5ch Stereo” mode. 21 “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source. Select an input source other than “MULTI CH.” 17 The unit is in the “2ch Stereo,” “STRAIGHT” or “Music Enh.2ch” mode. Exit from the “2ch Stereo,” “STRAIGHT” or “Music Enh2ch” mode. 21 ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 15 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 27 There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 27 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. 27 43 En English There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. APPENDIX FM Cause ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 35 ADVANCED OPERATION Set “MEM.GUARD” to “OFF.” BASIC OPERATION “MEM.GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON.” PREPARATION The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. INTRODUCTION Cause SILENT CINEMA is not activated. Remedy See page Problem Troubleshooting Problem AM ■ Cause The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. There are buzzing and whining noises. Remedy See page Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 27 Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — iPod Note • In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display, check the connection to your iPod (see page 14). Status message Cause Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. ■ Remedy Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. See page 14 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 14 Bluetooth Status message Searching... Cause Remedy See page The Bluetooth receiver and the Bluetooth component is in the middle of the pairing. The Bluetooth receiver and the Bluetooth component is in the middle of establishing the connection. Completed The paring is completed. Canceled The paring is canceled. BT connected The connection between the Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth component is established. Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Bluetooth receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately). No BT adapter The Bluetooth receiver is not connected to the DOCK terminal. 44 En Connect the Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal. 14 Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem Remedy See page The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 8 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 39 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 39 ■ Resetting the system Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. For details about the procedure of resetting the system, see “Initializing” in “Advanced setup” on page 40. BASIC OPERATION Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. PREPARATION Wrong distance or angle. INTRODUCTION The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 45 En Glossary ■ Audio information Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. DTS Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. 46 En Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ Sound field program information CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field program so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ Video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. Specifications AUDIO SECTION • Maximum Power (JEITA) [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ................................................ 135 W/ch [Asia, China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ................................................. 135 W/ch • IEC Power [U.K., Russia, and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.1% THD, 6 Ω ........................................ 90 W or more • Video Maximum Input Level ................................ 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component Signal .................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] .........87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.41 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5% • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Front ................................ 10 Hz to 100 kHz, 0/–3 dB V-AUX to Front ................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, 0/–3 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz GENERAL • Channel Separation CD, etc. Input 5.1 kΩ shorted (1 kHz/10 kHz) ................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 240 W/320 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 240 W • Tone Control BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Standby Power Consumption [Except Asia and General models] ...................................... 0.8 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. (STEREO) Input shorted 250 mV ............................................................... 100 dB or more 200 mV ................................................................. 98 dB or more • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 200 mV, 8 Ω) ....................................0.4 V/470 Ω • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] 5ch, 10%/THD ................................................................ 530 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 151 x 318 mm (17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 12-1/2”) • Weight ............................................................. 8.0 kg (17 lbs 10 oz) • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. 1 kHz, 0.5%THD (EFFECT ON) ............. 2.0 V or more • Output Level/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER OUTPUT (2ch Stereo and FRONT SP: SMALL) ..................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ APPENDIX • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 170 µV or less • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz [Australia model] .............................................. 240 V AC, 50 Hz [Korea model] ................................................... 220 V AC, 60 Hz [China model] ................................................... 220 V AC, 50 Hz [U.K., Russia, and Europe models] .................... 230 V AC, 50 Hz [Asia and General models] .............................................. 110-120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz ADVANCED OPERATION • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. (2ch stereo) to Front SP OUT, [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω ................................................... 0.06% or less [Other models] 1 kHz, 50 W/6 Ω ................................................... 0.06% or less BASIC OPERATION • Dynamic Power [U.S.A. and Canada models] (Impedance Selector: 8 Ω) (IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) .......................................... 110/130/160/180 W [Other models] (IHF, 6/4/2 Ω) .................................................... 105/130/150 W • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component .................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) PREPARATION • MAX Power Per Channel [U.K., Russia, and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................... 105 W or more VIDEO SECTION INTRODUCTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ............................................... 100 W/ch [Other models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ............................................... 100 W/ch • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct. * Specifications are subject to change without notice. English 47 En Index ■ Numerics 1 SOUND MENU .................................... 31, 32 2 INPUT MENU ...................................... 31, 34 2ch Stereo ...................................................... 25 3 OPTION MENU ................................... 31, 35 5ch Stereo ...................................................... 25 ■ A A)DISPLAY SET .......................................... 35 A)INPUT ASSIGN ........................................ 34 A)SPEAKER SET ......................................... 32 A.DELAY ...................................................... 34 A/B/C/D/E, front panel .................................... 3 Adjusting the speaker level ............................ 19 Adjusting the tonal quality ............................ 19 AM tuning ..................................................... 27 AMP, remote control ....................................... 5 ANTENNA terminals ...................................... 6 Audio cable plugs .......................................... 11 Audio delay ................................................... 34 AUDIO jacks ............................................. 6, 11 Audio jacks .................................................... 11 AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jacks, front panel ................................................... 3 AUDIO SEL, remote control ........................... 5 AUDIO SELECT ........................................... 18 Audio select ................................................... 36 Audio settings ................................................ 34 Automatic preset tuning ................................ 27 Automatic tuning ........................................... 27 ■ B B)INPUT RENAME ..................................... 34 B)MEMORY GUARD .................................. 35 B)SP LEVEL ................................................. 33 BAND LEVEL TITLE, remote control ........... 5 BAND, front panel .......................................... 3 BASIC SETUP ........................................ 16, 31 Basic setup ..................................................... 31 BASS OUT .................................................... 32 BGV ............................................................... 35 Bluetooth setting ............................................ 36 Bluetooth status message ............................... 44 BT connected, Bluetooth status message ...... 44 ■ C C)AUDIO SELECT ....................................... 36 C)SP DISTANCE .......................................... 33 C)VOLUME TRIM ....................................... 35 Canceled, Bluetooth status message .............. 44 CD Listening ................................................. 22 CD Music Listening ...................................... 22 CENTER ........................................................ 32 Center graphic equalizer ................................ 33 Center speaker ............................................... 32 Center width .................................................. 26 CINEMA DSP indicator .................................. 4 Completed, Bluetooth status message ........... 44 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .................... 6, 11 Connect error, iPod controlling status message ..................................................... 44 Connecting a DVD player ............................. 13 Connecting a TV ............................................ 12 Connecting audio components ...................... 13 Connecting speakers ........................................ 9 Connecting the AM antennas ........................ 15 Connecting the Bluetooth Wireless Audio Receiver .................................................... 14 Connecting the FM antennas ......................... 15 Connecting the power cable .......................... 15 Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock ........................................... 14 Connecting to CD player ............................... 13 Connecting to DVD recorder ......................... 13 Connecting to MD recorder/CD recorder ...... 13 Connecting to the CENTER terminals .......... 10 48 En Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .............................................11 Connecting to the FRONT A terminals .........10 Connecting to the FRONT B terminals ..........10 Connecting to the HDMI jacks ......................11 Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks ...........................................................14 Connecting to the SURROUND terminals ....10 Connecting video components .......................13 Control buttons, remote control .......................5 Creating original SCENE templates ..............23 CROSSOVER ................................................33 Crossover .......................................................33 CT WIDTH ....................................................26 Cursors/ENTER, remote control ......................5 ■ D D)CENTER GEQ ...........................................33 D)DECODER MODE ....................................35 D)PARAM. INI ..............................................36 Decoder indicator .............................................4 Decoder mode ................................................35 Decoder select mode ......................................35 DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jack ...............11 DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks ...............11 DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL assignment .....34 DIGITAL INPUT jacks ....................................6 DIMENSION .................................................26 Dimension ......................................................26 DIMMER .......................................................35 Dimmer ..........................................................35 Disc Listening ................................................22 Disconnected, Bluetooth status message .......44 Disconnected, iPod controlling status message .....................................................44 Display settings ..............................................35 DISPLAY, remote control ...............................5 DOCK indicator, Front panel display ..............4 Dock Listening ...............................................22 DOCK terminal ................................................6 DSP LEVEL ...................................................26 DSP level ........................................................26 DTS decoder prioritize setting .......................35 DVD Live Viewing ........................................22 DVD Movie Viewing .....................................22 DVD Viewing ................................................22 DVR Viewing ................................................22 Dynamic range ...............................................34 ■ E E)BLUETOOTH ............................................36 E)LFE LEVEL ...............................................34 E)MULTI CH SET .........................................35 EDIT PRESET/TUNING, front panel .............3 Editing sound field parameters ......................26 ENHANCER indicator .....................................4 ENHANCER, remote control ..........................5 Enjoying 2-channel sources using the standard decoders ................................26 Exchanging preset stations .............................28 ■ F F)D.RANGE ..................................................34 FM tuning .......................................................27 FRONT ...........................................................32 FRONT B .......................................................32 FRONT B speaker setting ..............................32 Front panel .......................................................3 Front panel display .......................................3, 4 Front speakers ................................................32 ■ G G)AUDIO SET ..............................................34 Game Playing .................................................23 ■ H Hall ................................................................ 25 HDMI ............................................................. 11 HDMI jack, HDMI cable plug ....................... 11 HDMI terminals ............................................... 6 Headphone dynamic range ............................ 34 Headphone LFE ............................................. 34 Headphones indicator ...................................... 4 HP D.R ........................................................... 34 HP LFE .......................................................... 34 ■ I Infrared window .............................................. 8 Infrared window, remote control ..................... 5 INI.VOL. ....................................................... 34 Initial volume ................................................. 34 Initializing ...................................................... 40 Input assignment ............................................ 34 Input channel and speaker indicators ............... 4 Input channel indicators ................................... 4 Input menu ..................................................... 31 Input rename .................................................. 34 Input selector buttons, remote control ............. 5 Input source indicators ..................................... 4 Input source information ............................... 20 INPUT, front panel .......................................... 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ......... 8 iPod connected, iPod controlling status message ..................................................... 44 iPod control, Status message ......................... 44 ■ J Jazz ................................................................ 25 ■ L LFE indicator ................................................... 4 LFE/Bass out ................................................. 32 Listening to unprocessed input signals .......... 26 Low-frequency effect level ............................ 34 ■ M Manual preset tuning ..................................... 28 MANUAL SETUP ........................................ 31 Manual setup .................................................. 31 Manual tuning ................................................ 27 MAX VOL. .................................................... 34 Maximum volume .......................................... 34 MEM.GUARD .............................................. 35 Memory guard ............................................... 35 MEMORY, front panel .................................... 3 MENU, remote control .................................... 5 Movie Dramatic ............................................. 25 Movie Spacious ............................................. 25 MULTI CH IN, remote control ....................... 5 MULTI CH INPUT jacks ................................ 6 Multi channel input setup .............................. 35 Multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones ....................... 26 Multi-information display ................................ 4 Music Disc Listening ..................................... 22 Music Enh. 2ch .............................................. 25 Music Enh. 5ch .............................................. 25 MUTE indicator ............................................... 4 MUTE TYP. .................................................. 34 Mute type ....................................................... 34 MUTE, remote control .................................... 5 Muting the audio output ................................ 19 ■ N NIGHT indicator .............................................. 4 Night listening mode ..................................... 19 NIGHT, front panel ......................................... 3 NIGHT, remote control ................................... 5 No BT adapter, Bluetooth status message ..... 44 Numeric buttons, remote control ..................... 5 Index ■ O Option menu ...................................................31 ■ P Pairing, Bluetooth control ..............................30 PANORAMA .................................................26 Panorama ........................................................26 Parameter initialization ..................................36 PCM indicator ..................................................4 PHONES jack, front panel ...............................3 Placing speakers ...............................................9 Playing video sources in the background .......20 Pop/Rock ........................................................25 PORTABLE (VIDEO AUX) jack, front panel ...................................................3 Power cable ......................................................6 POWER, remote control ..................................5 PRESET .........................................................40 Preset SCENE templates ................................22 PRESET/TUNING, front panel .......................3 PROG, remote control ......................................5 PROGRAM, front panel ...................................3 ■ R Radio Listening ..............................................22 Rear panel .........................................................6 Remote control .................................................5 Resetting the system .......................................40 RETURN, remote control ................................5 ■ S ■ T TEST .............................................................. 34 Test tone ......................................................... 34 TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 3 Troubleshooting ............................................. 41 Tuner indicators ............................................... 4 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L, front panel ............ 3 Turning off the power .................................... 15 Turning on the power ..................................... 15 TV control buttons, remote control ................. 5 TV Sports ....................................................... 25 TV Sports Viewing ........................................ 22 TV Viewing ................................................... 22 TV/AV POWER, remote control ..................... 5 ■ U UNIT .............................................................. 33 Unit ................................................................ 33 Unknown iPod, iPod controlling status message ..................................................... 44 Using the remote control ................................. 8 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks ........................ 15 Using your headphones .................................. 19 ■ V VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack, front panel ........ 3 Video cable plugs .......................................... 11 VIDEO jacks .............................................. 6, 11 Video jacks .................................................... 11 Virtual CINEMA DSP ................................... 26 VIRTUAL indicator ......................................... 4 VOLUME +/-, remote control ......................... 5 VOLUME control, front panel ........................ 3 VOLUME level indicator ................................ 4 Volume Trim ................................................. 35 ■ Z Zone B ........................................................... 18 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION “ASTANDBY/ON” or “fDVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to “Functional overview” on page 3. 49 En English SCENE ...........................................................21 SCENE 1/2/3/4, front panel .............................3 SCENE 1/2/3/4, remote control .......................5 Searching..., Bluetooth status message ..........44 Selecting audio input jacks .............................18 Selecting preset stations .................................28 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component as the input source ..................18 Selecting the night listening mode .................19 Selecting the SCENE templates .....................21 Set menu .........................................................31 Set this unit to the standby mode ...................15 Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control ..................24 Setting remote control codes ..........................39 Setting the speaker impedance .......................40 SIGNAL INFO ...............................................20 Signal information ..........................................31 SILENT CINEMA .........................................26 SILENT CINEMA indicator ............................4 SLEEP indicator ...............................................4 Sleep timer .....................................................20 SLEEP, remote control .....................................5 Sound field programs .....................................25 Sound menu ....................................................31 SP A B indicators .............................................4 SP D.R ............................................................34 SP IMP. ..........................................................40 SP LFE ...........................................................34 Speaker distance .............................................33 Speaker distances ...........................................33 Speaker dynamic range ..................................34 Speaker impedance .........................................40 Speaker level ..................................................33 Speaker LFE ...................................................34 Speaker settings ..............................................32 SPEAKERS terminals ......................................6 SPEAKERS, front panel ..................................3 Specifications .................................................47 STANDBY, remote control .............................5 STANDBY/ON, front panel .............................3 START PAIRING ..........................................36 Start pairing ....................................................36 Straight decoding mode ..................................26 STRAIGHT, front panel ...................................3 STRAIGHT, remote control .............................5 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack .........................6 Subwoofer phase ............................................ 33 Supplied accessories ........................................ 2 SUR. LR ........................................................ 32 SUR.DECODE, remote control ....................... 5 Surround left/right speakers ........................... 32 SWFR PHASE ............................................... 33 List of remote control codes Blu-ray Player Samsung 2137 CD Player Yamaha 5000, 5013 CD Recorder Yamaha 5001 DVD Acoustic Solutions 2078 Aiwa 2055, 2100 Akai 2096 Akura 2076 Alba 2078, 2086 Apex 2027, 2049 Awa 2078 Axion 2078 Brainwave 2096 Brandt 2073, 2085 Broksonic 2060 Bush 2075, 2078, 2112 Centrex 2077 Classic 2078 Clatronic 2075 Coby 2078 C-Tech 2074 CyberHome 2025, 2079, 2091 Daewoo 2092, 2098 Dansai 2096 Daytek 2080, 2089 DEC 2075 Denon 2030, 2102, 2103 Denver 2075, 2076 Diamond 2074 DK Digital 2094 Dual 2078 D-Vision 2096 DVX 2074 Elta 2096 Euroline 2096 Funai 2052, 2058 Global Solutions2074 Global Sphere 2074 Goodmans 2075, 2077, 2078 Grundig 2077, 2098 H&B 2075 Haaz 2074 HE 2078 Hitachi 2032, 2072 Home Electronics 2078 Innovation 2072 Irradio 2134 JDB 2078 JVC 2033, 2045, 2053, 2073, 2099 Kenwood 2030, 2097 Kingavon 2075 Koda 2075 Lawson 2074 Lenco 2075 LG 2084, 2087 Lifetec 2072 Limit 2074 LogicLab 2074 Luxor 2077 Magnavox 2037, 2073, 2075 Magnum 2072 i MBO Medion Micromaxx Micromedia Microstar Mitsubishi Mizuda Mustek Naiko Onkyo Orava P&B Pacific Panasonic 2078 2072 2072 2073 2072 2035 2075 2078 2077 2073, 2135 2075 2075 2074 2030, 2040, 2054, 2057, 2105, 2110 Philips 2019, 2026, 2046, 2073, 2081, 2090 Pioneer 2036, 2082 Proline 2077 Provision 2075 RCA 2031, 2042, 2050, 2051 Red Star 2076 Reoc 2074 Roadstar 2075, 2078, 2086 Rowa 2077 Saba 2085 Sabaki 2074 Samsung 2032, 2041, 2104, 2113 Sansui 2074 Sanyo 2095 ScanMagic 2078 Scientific Labs 2074 Scott 2088 SEG 2074, 2086 Sharp 2034, 2043, 2059, 2093, 2106 Silva 2076 Singer 2074 Skymaster 2074, 2078 Skyworth 2076 SM Electronic 2074, 2078 Sony 2028, 2029, 2039, 2083, 2107 Soundmaster 2074 Soundmax 2074 Standard 2074 Star Cluster 2074 Starmedia 2075 Supervision 2074, 2078 Sylvania 2052, 2058 Synn 2074 TCM 2072 Teac 2074 Tec 2076 Technics 2030 Technika 2096 Technosonic 2096 Tevion 2072, 2074 Thomson 2085, 2109 Tokai 2076 Toshiba 2026, 2044, 2048, 2056, 2073, 2108, 2111 United 2078 Voxson 2078 Wharfedale 2074 Xlogic 2074 Yakumo 2077 Yamada 2077 Yamaha Yukai Zenith 2000, 2001, 2003, 2030, 2101 2078 2038, 2047, 2073 DVD Recorder Apex JVC LG Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Sony Toshiba Yamaha Yukai 2024 2070 2071 2020, 2065, 2066, 2067 2019, 2061, 2062, 2063 2021 2018 2022, 2064 2068 2023 2069 DVD/LD Pioneer 2036 DVD/VCR JVC LG Panasonic Philips RCA Samsung Sharp Sony Toshiba Zenith 1017, 2045 1071, 2087 1020, 1072, 2040, 2105 1025 1022, 2042 1021, 2041, 2104 1023, 1073, 2043, 2106 1019, 1074, 2039, 2107 1024, 1075, 2044, 2108 1026, 2047 DVD/DVR Panasonic Pioneer Samsung Toshiba 2132 2132 2132 2132 2015, 2016, 2017, 2120 Philips 2117, 2121, 2123, 2128 Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014 Proscan 2129 RCA 2116, 2124, 2129, 2133 ReplayTV 2118, 2119, 2120 Sharp 2009, 2010 Sonic Blue 2119, 2120 Sony 2005, 2006, 2007, 2122, 2130, 2131, 2132 Stack 10 2132 Stack 9 2132 Systemax 2132 Tagar Systems 2132 Tivo 2116, 2121, 2122, 2123, 2130, 2131 Toshiba 2004, 2125, 2132 Touch 2132 UltimateTV 2133 Viewsonic 2132 Voodoo 2132 Yamaha 2011 ZT Group 2132 HD DVD Toshiba 2132 2132 2132 2132 2123, 2128, 2129, 2133 DISH Network 2126, 2127 Dishpro 2126 Echostar 2126, 2127 Expressvu 2126 Gateway 2132 GOI 2126 Hewlett Packard 2132 Hitachi 2008 Howard Computers 2132 HTS 2126 Hughes 2123, 2128 Humax 2123 Hush 2132 iBUYPOWER 2132 JVC 2126, 2127 Linksys 2132 Media Center PC 2132 2136 iPod Yamaha 5011 LD Player Yamaha 2067 2114 2115 2068 DVR ABS Alienware CyberPower Dell DIRECTV Microsoft Mind Niveus Media Northgate Panasonic 2002 MD Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004 Tape Deck Yamaha 5005, 5006 Tuner Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5012, 5014, 5015, 5016, 5017, 5018 TV Acer Acme Acura ADA ADC Admiral Adyson Agashi Agazi AGB Aiko Aiwa 0093 0207 0208 0255 0206 0058, 0205, 0206, 0210, 0211 0200, 0207 0200 0206 0204 0127, 0200, 0207, 0208 0028, 0139, 0229, 0237 Akai Cascade Cathay CCE Celebrity Centurion Century CGE Cimline Citizen 0208 0213, 0217 0127 0059 0213, 0217 0205 0214, 0215 0208, 0218 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 City 0208 Clarivox 0212, 0217 Clatronic 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0214, 0218 CMS 0200 Colortyme 0060, 0061 Concerto 0060, 0061 Concorde 0208 Condor 0200, 0207, 0213 Contec 0200, 0207, 0208 Contec/Cony 0062 Continental Edison 0216 Cosmel 0208 Craig 0062 Crosley 0205, 0214, 0215 Crown 0062, 0063, 0128, 0208, 0213, 0217 CS Electronics 0200, 0207, 0209, 0214, 0218 CTC 0214 Curtis Mathes 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064, 0065 CXC 0062 Cybertron 0209, 0218 Daewoo 0060, 0061, 0120, 0127, 0155, 0193, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0218, 0238 Dainichi 0200, 0209, 0218 Dansai 0200, 0206, 0213, 0217 Dantax 0217 Daytron 0060, 0061, 0208 De Graaf 0210 Decca 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217 Desmet 0213, 0217 Diamond 0200 Dimensia 0057 Dixi 0208, 0213, 0217 DTS 0208 Dual 0207, 0215, 0216 Dual-Tec 0207, 0208, 0215 Dumont 0060, 0127, 0205, 0207 Durabrand 0126 Dux 0217 Dynatron 0213, 0217 Elbe 0203, 0204, 0212, 0218 Elbe-Sharp 0204 Elcit 0204, 0205 ELECTRO TECH 0208 Electroband 0059 Electrohome 0059, 0060, 0061 Elin 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 Elite 0209, 0213, 0218 Elman 0215 Elta 0200, 0208 Emerson 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064, 0128, 0205 Envision Erres ESA Etron Euro-Feel Euroline Euroman Euromann Europhon 0060, 0061 0213, 0217 0080 0208 0206 0217 0200 0206, 0207, 0213 0200, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215 Fenner 0208 Ferguson 0212, 0217, 0226 Fidelity 0200, 0207, 0210 Finlandia 0210 Finlux 0204, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217 Firstline 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214 Fisher 0064, 0127, 0128, 0205, 0207, 0215 Flint 0213, 0218 Formenti 0200, 0205, 0207, 0215, 0217 Formenti-Phoenix 0200 Fortress 0205 Frontech 0206, 0208, 0210, 0211, 0214 Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025, 0088, 0127 Funai 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0062, 0206 Futuretech 0062 Gateway 0094 GBC 0208, 0215, 0218 GE 0057, 0060, 0061, 0122, 0147 GEC 0204, 0207, 0211, 0213, 0217 Geloso 0208, 0210, 0215 General Technic 0208 Genexxa 0209, 0211, 0213, 0218 Gibralter 0060 GoldHand 0200 GoldStar 0060, 0061, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Goodmans 0171, 0201, 0204, 0206, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0240 GPM 0209, 0218 Graetz 0211 Granada 0204, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217 Grandin 0208, 0209, 0217 Grundig 0128, 0130, 0222, 0236, 0255 Grunpy 0062 Halifax 0200, 0206, 0207 Hallmark 0060, 0061 Hampton 0200, 0207 Hanseatic 0203, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0215, 0217 Hantarex 0204, 0208 Harvard 0062 HCM 0206, 0207, 0208, 0218 Hifivox 0216 Higashi 0200 Hinari 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Hisawa Hitachi 0209, 0218 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0060, 0061, 0095, 0105, 0127, 0156, 0179, 0180, 0204, 0207, 0210, 0211, 0215, 0216, 0251 Hornyphon 0213 Hoshai 0209, 0218 Huanyu 0200, 0207 Hygashi 0200, 0207 Hyper 0200, 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 Hypson 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 ICE 0127, 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 ICeS 0200, 0218 IMA 0062 Imperial 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215 Indiana 0213, 0217 Infinity 0063 Ingelen 0211 Ingersol 0208 Inno Hit 0201, 0204, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Innovation 0206, 0208 Interbuy 0208, 0214 Interfunk 0205, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0216, 0217 International 0200 Intervision 0206, 0207, 0218 Irradio 0201, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Isukai 0209, 0218 ITC 0207, 0215 ITS 0200, 0209, 0213, 0218 ITT 0129, 0208, 0211 ITV 0208, 0217 JBL 0063 JC Penney 0057, 0060, 0061 JCB 0059 Jensen 0060, 0061 JVC 0017, 0018, 0019, 0108, 0136, 0153, 0178, 0190, 0213, 0218 Kaisui 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0218 Kamosonic 0207 Kamp 0200, 0207 Kapsch 0211 Karcher 0207, 0208, 0212, 0217 Kawasho 0059, 0060, 0061, 0200 Kendo 0128, 0210 Kennedy 0215 Kenwood 0060, 0061 Kingsley 0200, 0207 Kloss Novabeam 0062 Kneissel 0203 Kolster 0213 Konka 0209, 0218 Korpel 0213, 0217 Korting 0205 Koyoda 0208 KTV 0062, 0127, 0207 Kyoto 0200, 0212 ii APPENDIX 0059, 0065, 0127, 0129, 0130, 0200, 0204, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218, 0255 Akiba 0209, 0218 Akura 0206, 0209, 0218 Alaron 0200 Alba 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0217, 0218 ALBIRAL 0212 Allstar 0213 Amplivision 0207 Amstrad 0204, 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218 Amtron 0062 Anam 0208 Anam National 0062 Anglo 0208 Anitech 0206, 0208 Ansonic 0203, 0208 AOC 0060, 0061 Apex 0118, 0122, 0132 Arc en Ciel 0216 Arcam 0200 Arcam Delta 0207 Aristona 0213, 0217 ASA 0205, 0211 Asberg 0213 Astra 0208 Asuka 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 Atlantic 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 Atori 0208 Audiosonic 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0218 AudioTon 0207 Audiovox 0062 Autovox 0205, 0206, 0207 Awa 0200 Baird 0216 Bang & Olufsen 0205 Basic Line 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Bastide 0207 Baur 0217 Beko 0228 Belcor 0060 Bell & Howell 0058, 0064 Benq 0081 Beon 0213, 0217 Bestar 0213 Binatone 0207 Black Star 0214 Blaupunkt 0255 Blue Sky 0209, 0218 Bondstec 0214 Boots 0207 Bradford 0062 Brandt 0216, 0226 Brionvega 0205, 0213, 0217 Britannia 0200, 0207 Brockwood 0060 Broksonic 0138 Bruns 0205 BSR 0215 BTC 0209, 0218 Bush 0177, 0208, 0209, 0210, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218, 0230, 0237 Candle 0060, 0061 Capsonic 0206 Lenco Lenoir Lesa Leyco LG 0208 0207, 0208 0214 0206, 0213, 0217 0016, 0038, 0039, 0127, 0128, 0157, 0158, 0163, 0164, 0166, 0188, 0189, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Liesenk 0217 Life 0206, 0208 Lifetec 0206, 0208, 0218 Loewe 0063, 0128, 0203, 0204, 0223, 0227 Loewe Opta 0205, 0213, 0217 Logik 0058 Luma 0210, 0217 Lumatron 0210, 0213, 0217 Lux May 0213 Luxman 0060, 0061 Luxor 0201, 0207, 0210 LXI 0057, 0061, 0063, 0064 Magnadyne 0204, 0205, 0214, 0215, 0217 Magnafon 0200, 0204, 0207 Magnavox 0060, 0061, 0063, 0102, 0103, 0150 Magnum 0206, 0208 Majestic 0058 Mandor 0206 Manesth 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 Marantz 0060, 0061, 0063, 0090, 0213, 0217 Marelli 0205 Mark 0200, 0213, 0217 Matsui 0204, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0217 Mediator 0213, 0217 Medion 0206, 0208 Megatron 0061 Melectronic 0200, 0207, 0208, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217 Memorex 0058, 0061, 0064, 0208 Memphis 0208 Metz 0205 MGA 0060, 0061 Micromaxx 0206, 0208 Microstar 0206, 0208 Minerva 0204 Minoka 0213 Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0060, 0061, 0104, 0112, 0113, 0125, 0205, 0213 Mivar 0200, 0201, 0202, 0203, 0204, 0207 Montgomery Ward 0058 MTC 0060, 0061, 0128, 0200 Multi System 0217 Multitech 0062, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0214, 0215, 0217 Murphy 0200, 0207 NAD 0061 Naonis 0210 iii NEC 0026, 0053, 0060, 0061, 0096, 0127 Neckermann 0205, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217, 0255 NEI 0213, 0217 Nesco 0214 NET-TV 0082, 0101 New Tech 0208, 0213 New World 0209, 0218 Nicamagic 0200, 0207 Nikkai 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Nikko 0061 Nobliko 0200, 0207 Nogamatic 0216 Nokia 0129, 0211 Nordmende 0205, 0211, 0213, 0216 Nordvision 0217 Oceanic 0211 Olevia 0084 ONCEAS 0207 Onwa 0062, 0218 Orbit 0213 Orion 0126, 0204, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0235 Orline 0218 Orsowe 0204 Osaki 0127, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 Osio 0201 Oso 0209, 0218 Osume 0218 Otto Versand 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0255 Pael 0200, 0207 Palladium 0207 Panama 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208 Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0063, 0073, 0074, 0097, 0110, 0114, 0137, 0141, 0151, 0162, 0165, 0186, 0204, 0211, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254 Pathe Cinema 0200, 0203, 0207, 0212, 0215 Pathe Marconi 0212, 0216 Pausa 0208 Perdio 0200 Philco 0060, 0061, 0063, 0128, 0205, 0214, 0215 Philharmonic 0207 Philips 0040, 0060, 0063, 0072, 0115, 0116, 0124, 0130, 0150, 0175, 0184, 0187, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217, 0220, 0221, 0232, 0233, 0252, 0253 Philips Magnavox 0124 Phoenix 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 Phonola 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 Pilot 0060 Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0060, 0061, 0098, 0109, 0117, 0128, 0181, 0182, 0194, 0195, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0250 Plantron 0206, 0213 Polaroid 0075 Poppy 0208 Portland 0060, 0061 Prandoni-Prince 0204, 0210 Precision 0207 Prima 0208, 0211 Profex 0208 Profi-Tronic 0213 Proline 0213 Proscan 0057 Prosonic 0200, 0207, 0217 Protech 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Proton 0060, 0061 Provision 0217 Pulsar 0060 Pye 0213, 0217 Pymi 0208 Quasar 0152, 0214 Quelle 0201, 0206, 0207, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Radialva 0218 Radio Shack 0064 Radio Shack/Realistic 0057, 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 Radiola 0213, 0217 Radiomarelli 0204, 0205, 0214 Radiotone 0213 RCA 0057, 0060, 0061, 0091, 0133, 0135, 0147, 0149 Realistic 0064 Revox 0213, 0217 Rex 0206, 0210, 0211 RFT 0203, 0205 Rhapsody 0200 R-Line 0213, 0217 Roadstar 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218, 0237 Robotron 0205 Rowa 0200 RTF 0205 Saba 0204, 0205, 0211, 0216 saccs 0212 Saisho 0204, 0206, 0207, 0208 Salora 0201, 0204, 0210, 0211, 0215 Sambers 0204 Sampo 0060, 0061, 0083, 0101 Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0060, 0061, 0065, 0068, 0069, 0071, 0079, 0087, 0127, 0128, 0130, 0144, 0160, 0161, 0170, 0176, 0183, 0185, 0200, 0201, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0239, 0241, 0242, 0243 Sandra 0200, 0207 Sansui 0123, 0126, 0213 Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0060, 0064, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0203, 0207, 0215 SBR 0217 SCHAUB LORENTZ 0211 Schneider 0207, 0209, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218 Scotch 0061 Scott 0060, 0061, 0062 Sears 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064 SEG 0200, 0206, 0207, 0214, 0215, 0217 SEI 0204 SEI-Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0211 Seleco 0210, 0211, 0215 Sencora 0208 Sentra 0218 Serino 0200 Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011, 0060, 0061, 0066, 0070, 0087, 0111, 0143, 0145, 0167, 0168, 0169, 0198, 0204, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0249 Shogun 0060 Siarem 0204, 0205, 0215 Sicatel 0212 Siemens 0255 Sierra 0213 Signature 0058 Silva 0200 Singer 0205, 0214, 0215 Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0215, 0217 Skantic 0211 Solavox 0211 Sonoko 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217 Sonolor 0211 Sontec 0213, 0217 Sony 0041, 0059, 0067, 0085, 0086, 0174, 0196, 0199, 0208, 0219, 0234 Sound & Vision 0209, 0218 Soundesign 0060, 0061, 0062 Soundwave 0213, 0217 SSS 0060, 0062 Standard 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Starlight 0217 Starlite 0062 Stenway 0218 Stern 0210, 0211 Sunkai 0208, 0218 Sunwood 0208, 0213 Superla 0200, 0204, 0207 SuperTech 0200 Supra 0208 Supreme 0059 Susumu 0209 Sutron 0208 Sydney 0200, 0207 Sylvania 0060, 0061, 0063, 0080, 0134, 0142, 0148 Symphonic 0062, 0080 Sysline 0217 Sytong 0200 Tandy Weltblick 0213, 0217 Weston 0215 White Westinghouse 0200, 0207, 0217 Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0060, 0061 Yamishi 0218 Yoko 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Yorx 0209, 0218 Zanussi 0210 Zenith 0058, 0060, 0100, 0105, 0119, 0121, 0154 TV/DVD Aiwa Apex Broksonic Bush JVC Panasonic RCA Sylvania Thomson Toshiba 0139, 2055 0132, 2049 0138, 2060 0230, 2112 0136, 2053 0137, 0254, 2054, 2110 0133, 0135, 2050, 2051 0134, 2052 0226, 2109 0131, 0231, 2048, 2111 TV/DVD/VCR Panasonic Samsung Sharp Sylvania Toshiba 0141, 1040, 2057 0241, 1070, 2113 0143, 1028, 2059 0142, 1041, 2058 0140, 1029, 2056 TV/VCR Aiwa Bush Daewoo GE Goodmans Grundig Hitachi JVC Magnavox Orion Panasonic Philips Quasar RCA Roadstar Samsung Sharp Sony Sylvania Tatung Toshiba Zenith 0237, 1066 0237, 1066 0155, 0238, 1038, 1067 0147, 1030 0240, 1069 0236, 1062 0156, 1039 0153, 1036 0150, 1033 0235, 1065 0151, 1034 0150, 0232, 0233, 1033, 1062, 1063 0152, 1035 0149, 1032 0237, 1066 0144, 0239, 1027, 1068 0145, 1028 0234, 1064 0148, 1031 0237, 1066 0146, 0237, 1029, 1066 0154, 1037 VCR Admiral Adventura Aiwa Akai Akiba Akura 1008, 1013 1005 1005, 1042, 1043, 1044, 1066 1007, 1043 1050 1043, 1050 Alba American High Amstrad Anitech ASA Asha Asuka 1044, 1050 1004 1042 1050 1045, 1046 1002, 1014 1042, 1045, 1046, 1050 Audio Dynamics1000 Audiovox 1003 Baird 1042, 1043, 1047 Basic Line 1044, 1050 Baur 1046 Beaumark 1002, 1014 Bell & Howell 1001 Blaupunkt 1046, 1048 Broksonic 1012, 1013 Bush 1044, 1050, 1066 Calix 1003 Candle 1002, 1003 Canon 1004 CCE 1006 CGE 1042, 1043 Cimline 1044, 1050 Citizen 1002, 1003 Colortyme 1000 Colt 1006 Craig 1002, 1003, 1006, 1014 Crown 1050 Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002, 1004, 1009 Cybernex 1002, 1014 Daewoo 1005, 1038, 1061, 1067 Dansai 1050 Dantax 1044 DBX 1000 De Graaf 1046, 1049 Decca 1042, 1043, 1046 Denon 1010 Dimensia 1009 Dual 1043, 1046 Dumont 1042, 1046, 1047, 1049 Dynatech 1005 Electrohome 1003 Electrophonic 1003 Elta 1050 Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005, 1012, 1013 Etzuko 1050 Ferguson 1043 Fidelity 1042 Finlandia 1046, 1047, 1049 Finlux 1042, 1043, 1046, 1047, 1049 FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049, 1050 Fisher 1001, 1047 Flint 1044 Formenti/Phoenix 1046 Fuji 1004 Fujitsu 1042 Funai 1005, 1042 Galaxy 1042 Garrard 1005 GBC 1050 GE 1002, 1004, 1009, 1014, 1030 GEC 1046 Geloso 1050 General Technic 1044, 1048 Go Video 1014 GoldHand Goldstar 1050 1000, 1003, 1042, 1045 Goodmans 1042, 1045, 1050, 1069 Gradiente 1005 Graetz 1043, 1047 Granada 1046, 1047, 1049 Grandin 1042, 1045, 1050 Grundig 1046, 1050, 1062 Hanseatic 1045, 1046 Harley Davidson1005 Harman/Kardon 1000 Harwood 1006 HCM 1050 Headquarter 1001 Hinari 1044, 1050 Hisawa 1044 Hitachi 1007, 1010, 1039, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1049 Hughes Network Systems 1010 Hypson 1044, 1050 Imperial 1042 Inno Hit 1046, 1050 Innovation 1044, 1048 Instant Replay 1004 Interbuy 1045 Interfunk 1046, 1047 Intervision 1042 Irradio 1045, 1050 ITT 1043, 1047 ITV 1045 JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1006 JCL 1004 Jensen 1007 JVC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1017, 1036, 1043 Kaisui 1050 Karcher 1046 Kendo 1044 Kenwood 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043 KLH 1006 Kodak 1003, 1004 Korpel 1050 Leyco 1050 LG 1003, 1042, 1045, 1071 Lifetec 1044, 1048 Lloyd’s 1005 Loewe 1048 Loewe Opta 1045, 1046 Logik 1006, 1050 Luxor 1047 LXI 1003 M Electronic 1042 Magnasonic 1047 Magnavox 1004, 1018, 1033 Magnin 1003, 1014 Manesth 1050 Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004, 1046, 1051 Marta 1003 Matsui 1044, 1045 Matsushita 1004 Mediator 1046 Medion 1044, 1048 MEI 1004 iv APPENDIX 0127, 0207, 0209, 0211, 0218 Tashiko 0200, 0207, 0210 Tatung 0127, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217, 0237 TCM 0206, 0208 Teac 0127 Tec 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 Techwood 0060, 0061 Teknika 0058, 0060, 0061, 0062 Teleavia 0216 Telecor 0218 Telefunken 0065, 0213, 0216 Telegazi 0218 Teletech 0208, 0214, 0217 Teleton 0207 Televideon 0200 Tensai 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Tesmet 0213 Tevion 0206, 0208 Texet 0200, 0207 Thomson 0191, 0192, 0207, 0213, 0216, 0226 Thorn 0212, 0217 TMK 0060, 0061 Tokai 0213 Tokyo 0200, 0207 Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0064, 0078, 0089, 0090, 0106, 0107, 0127, 0131, 0140, 0146, 0159, 0197, 0225, 0231, 0237 Towada 0211, 0215 Transtec 0200 Trident 0204 Tristar 0218 Triumph 0204 Uher 0211, 0213 Ultravox 0200, 0205, 0207, 0214, 0215 United 0217 Universum 0127, 0128, 0129, 0201, 0206, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Univox 0212 Vestel 0210, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Vexa 0208, 0217 Victor 0213 VIDEOLOGIC 0200 Videologique 0200, 0207, 0209, 0218 Videosat 0214 VideoSystem 0213 Videotechnic 0200 Vidtech 0060, 0061 Viewsonic 0076, 0077, 0092, 0099, 0172, 0173 Visiola 0200, 0207 Vision 0213 Vortec 0213, 0217 Voxson 0205, 0210, 0211, 0213 Waltham 0207, 0212 Wards 0057, 0058, 0060, 0061, 0063 Watson 0213, 0217, 0218 Watt Radio 0200, 0207, 0212, 0215 Wega 0205 © 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Printed in China WQ96000 00_Sheet_HTR-6230_UC.book Page 1 Friday, December 26, 2008 1:33 PM UC HTR-6230 The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual. Les lettres dans les cercles et les numéros dans les carrés correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi. ■ Front panel/Face avant T C D E F G H I P VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT PRESET/TUNING l A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING h BAND MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 PHONES TONE CONTROL PROGRAM l STANDBY /ON 4 3 INPUT STRAIGHT l h VIDEO AUX NIGHT h EFFECT SILENT CINEMA A 2 VIDEO B K L M N O J Q AUDIO R PORTABLE S 00_Sheet_HTR-6230_UC.book Page i Friday, December 26, 2008 1:33 PM ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande a c b POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER C MUTE d e MD/CD-R TUNER CD DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 TV CH f g TV VOL h SCENE i 4 MENU VOLUME PRESET/CH ENTER n A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E j l 3 k BAND LEVEL TITLE m P R E S E T/C H RETURN DISPLAY o REC p r q t v w PROG 1 ENHANCER SUR.DECODE 2 STRAIGHT 5 3 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 4 NIGHT 6 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT s u x y Printed in China WQ96070-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptor
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
- Este manual también es adecuado para
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Le manuel du propriétaire
- italiano: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Manuale del proprietario
- English: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Owner's manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Bedienungsanleitung
- русский: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Инструкция по применению
- Nederlands: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver de handleiding
- português: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Brugervejledning
- polski: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver El kitabı
- suomi: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Omistajan opas
- română: Yamaha HTR 6230 - AV Receiver Manualul proprietarului
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha HTR-6025 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha RX-V363 - AV Receiver El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha R-S201 El manual del propietario
-
-
Yamaha RX-V563 El manual del propietario
-
-
-
Yamaha R-S300 El manual del propietario
-
-
Yamaha RX-V465 El manual del propietario
Otros documentos
-
Sony HT-CT290 Instrucciones de operación
-
Sharp LB-1085 El manual del propietario
-
-
Samsung HT-J5100K Manual de usuario
-
Sherwood RD-5405 Instrucciones de operación
-
Abus TVAC80020B Guía del usuario
-
Sherwood RD-6505 Instrucciones de operación
-
Sony UCH20C Manual de usuario
-
Sony UCH20 Manual de usuario
-
Peerless XHB492 Guía del usuario